← All chapters

§4 Nouns

The nominal system of Pine is complex and involves grammatical cases, apophony and diaphony. Pine has a rich system of nominal declensions, which are based on the phonological structure of the noun – the number of syllables of a noun, whether polysyllabic nouns begin with a vowel or a consonant, if the initial consonant of the noun and its stressed coda share the same broad place of articulation, whether a noun ends in a consonant or a vowel, and whether the stressed vowel and the last vowel of a vocalic noun have the same broad place of articulation are some of the most common features that define a noun’s declension type.

Pine nouns are declined for multiple cases (nine cases but only seven surface forms) and two numbers. This means that each noun has two sets of seven different forms. The case alignment system of Pine is called diplologous – there are two different possible case markings for the subject of both monovalent and polyvalent verbs – the active case for agentive subjects, and the patientive case for unagentive subjects. Objects only have one case, called the accusative. There are in fact three cases that share a surface form: the patientive case of unagentive subjects, the accusative case of objects, and the genitive, which indicates possession or some attributive quality of a noun to another argument. The name of this form shared by the patientive, accusative and genitive cases is the sematic form. The form of unmarked nouns in the active case are called the asematic form. The words asematic and active are sometimes used interchangeably, but active denotes the function of the case, while asematic denotes the lack of markings of a noun. All asematic nouns are therefore in the active case, but sematic nouns can be in the patientive, accusative or genitive case.

subjectnon-subject
formasematicsematicsematic
caseactivepatientiveaccusativegenitive
functionagentive subjectunagentive subjectobjectpossession

The asematic and sematic cases (active, patientive, accusative and genitive) form the primary cases of Pine. Nouns can appear in other cases, which collectively are referred to as oblique cases. Oblique cases are most often derived from the sematic form of a noun. The oblique cases are:

inessive-indicates static location (in, at, on)
illative-indicates movement to location (to, into, onto)
ellative-indicates movement from location (from, out of, off)
comitative-indicates accompaniment, instrumentality, manner or area
essive-indicates state (translative or stative)

Adjectives do not decline when attributive to a noun, but they do decline when they are in attributive position without a head noun.

The case system of Pine can be organised as shown in the table below. Case categories indicate whether a specific case applies to subjects, objects or oblique arguments. The form base indicates whether a case is formed on the basis of the unmarked or marked form of the noun. The case itself is the morphosyntactic function description, and the approximate function is given for each case.

case categoryform basecasefunction
subject casesasematicactiveagentive subject
sematicpatientiveunagentive subject
object caseaccusativeobject
time expressions
(at/on/during)
oblique casesgenitivepossessor
sematic derivedinessivestationary location (in/on/at)
illativemovement towards (in/on)
elativemovement away (from/off)
comitativeinstrumental (with)
accompaniment
(with, along with)
perlative
(along path, along surface, radius)
adverbial
(in a specific manner)
asematic derivedessivestate (transient or resultative)
function (as)

§4.1 Overview of Nominal Declensions

The most fundamental grouping of declensions is based on the number of syllables. As such, declensions are organised into four fundamental categories: monosyllabic nouns, bisyllabic nouns, polysyllabic nouns and finally teleutophonic nouns, which have two or more syllables, and whose last syllable changes regularly in the sematic form.

To better understand how declensions are organised in Pine, it is useful to understand the following concepts that relate to nominal declensions and declension groups.

§4.1.1 Onset & Coda

Bisyllabic nouns that begin with a consonant decline according to the relationship between the word-initial consonant, or onset, and the first consonant following the stressed vowel, or the coda. For example, the world kaḍka ‘grass’ has k- as its onset and -- as its coda. In the context of noun declension, unless specified otherwise, onset and coda always refer to the stressed syllable of a noun.

§4.1.2 Heterorganic & Homorganic

The relationship between the onset and coda of bisyllabic words is an important feature of Pine declension patterns. The words homorganic and heterorganic refer to this relationship. Onsets and codas are organised into three broad categories: labial, coronal and dorsal. Note that the glide -v- is included in consonants with regard to this, but the glide -į- is not, and is instead considered to be a vowel. In clusters not listed below, only the first member of a cluster determines the place of articulation.

labial

m ṃ p b v

coronal

t d ḍ s ṡ ts tṡ r ṛ l ḷ ƛ lį ḷį n ṇ nį ṇį dn ng kn

dorsal

k g ġ h hį ḥ kṇ tġ

When both the onset and the coda of a noun belong to the same category, the noun is said to be homorganic. If the onset belongs to one category and the coda to another, the noun is said to be heterorganic. For example, the word tsukṇi ‘knife’ has a coronal onset (ts-) but a dorsal-initial coda (-kṇ-), which makes tsukṇi a heterorganic noun. In contrast, the word ṇįirra ‘nose’ has both a coronal onset (ṇį-) and coda (-rr-), making it homorganic. The word ṛirka ‘raven’ has a complex coda, but only the initial consonant (-r-, not -k- in -rk-) matters here. Because both ṛ- and -r- are coronal, ṛirka is a homorganic noun.

Homorganic nouns gain a word-final -n in the sematic form, whereas heterorganic nouns do not. For example, tsukṇi ‘knife’ has the sematic form tsuoġne, while ṛirka ‘raven’ has the sematic form ṛỉrkkon.

Organicity and phonicity combine to give four different types of nouns, which constitute a significant portion of all nominal declensions: bisyllabic non-consonantal nouns:

homorganicitysymphonicity
symphonic antiphonic
homorganichomorganic symphonichomorganic antiphonic
keggi 'day'
gaġva 'curve'
nini 'sand'
kikta 'bone'
lįidna 'wound'
naṡki 'catkin'
heterorganicheterorganic symphonicheterorganic antiphonic
barva 'pot, bowl'
gamppa 'cake'
ṇuokku 'tree'
bakvi 'house'
lįaġvi 'pulk'
miṡku 'medicine'

§4.1.3 Archeaphonic vs. Enteraphonic

Bisyllabic nouns that begin with a consonant may be either homorganic or heteorganic, and are called archeaphonic. But not all nouns begin with a consonant. Vowel-initial nouns are called enteraphonic nouns, which is a grouping of bisyllabic noun declensions. All enteraphonic nouns have a sematic form in -n, for example alda ‘book’ has the sematic form ảltten .

§4.1.4 Symphonic vs. Antiphonic

The words symphonic and antiphonic refer to a similar idea as homorganic and heterorganic nouns. Instead of comparing the place of articulation of the onset and coda of bisyllabic nouns, symphony and antiphony is a comparison between the stressed nucleus of a noun (its first stressed vowel) and the word-final vowel of the same word. Pine distinguishes three types of vowels:

amphiphonic vowels

e i a

opisthophonic vowels

á o u oa

prosthophonic vowels

y ů ai ả

Amphiphonic and prosthophonic vowels often cluster together, but in cases where a noun contains only prosthophonic vowels, then the alignment is considered prosthophonic, but if amphiphonic and prosthophonic vowels co-occur, then the noun is amphiphonic with prosthothesis. For example, tůaƛƛa 'large pine' is amphiphonic (and would require prosthothesis if any ending added contains -u- or -o-), while ṇysky 'lack' is purely prosthophonic. The stressed vowel <a> (indicated here as á) is opisthophonic, but unstressed <a> is amphiphonic.

The long vowel [æː] is considered front, but all other long vowels belong to the same class as their non-long counterparts. Likewise, the first member of a diphthong dictates whether the diphthong itself is an amphiphonic, opisthophonic or a prosthophonic diphthong:

front diphtongs

ei ey eů ie ia iu ůi ay ai

back diphthongs

oi ui au

Polarity refers to the front or back quality of a vowel. When both the stressed nucleus and the word-final vowel of a word are both amphiphonic/prosthophonic or opisthophonic, the noun is said to be symphonic. If the stressed nucleus and the word-final vowel are not both either amphiphonic/prosthophonic or opisthophonic, then the noun is said to be antiphonic. If both the stressed nucleus and word-final vowel are prosthophones, then the polarity is said to be prosthophonic.

stressed nucleusword-final vowelpolarity
amphiphonee/iisymphonic
y
uantiphonic
prosthophoney/ů/ả/aiisymphonic
yprosthophonic
opisthophonea/o/uusymphonic
iantiphonic

This means that for consonant-initial and vowel-final bisyllabic nouns, which is the largest declension group in Pine, the exact declension pattern is determined by whether they are heterorganic and symphonic, heterorganic and antiphonic, homorganic and symphonic, or homorganic and antiphonic.

Antiphonic heterorganic nouns have a sematic form ending in a lax vowel (-e, -o, -ů), while symphonic heterorganic nouns have a sematic form ending in a tense vowel (-i, -u, -y). For example, bakvi ‘house’ is antiphonic and has the sematic form boagve, while biḍmi ‘soup’ is symphonic and has the sematic form bỉṃṃu.

Likewise, all symphonic nouns, whether heterorganic or homorganic, see their final vowel undergo polarity inversion, which is the change from a back vowel to a front vowel, or a front vowel to a back vowel, for example as in biḍmi ‘soup’, where the final vowel -i goes to -u. Polarity inversion does not affect -y- and -ů- however. Polarity inversion triggers additional changes in the stressed nucleus, causing fronting if the polarity inversion is towards a front vowel, and backing if it is towards a back vowel. For example, lủbma ‘speech, speaking’ is heterorganic symphonic, which means the final -a becomes -i in the sematic form, which also causes fronting of the -- to -ey-. Finally, diaphony occurs, changing -bm- to -mm-, to yield the sematic form leymmi.

§4.1.5 Consonantal Nouns

Beyond enteraphonic and archeaphonic nouns of the bisyllabic declension group, there are also mono-, bi- and polysyllabic nouns that end in a consonant. Consonantal nouns are declined according to their word-final consonant, and in some cases the quality of the vowel that precedes it. Their sematic form is one syllable longer (with a few exceptions in the bisyllabic -s consonantal declension) and ends in a vowel. For example, all polysyllabic nouns ending in -n have a sematic form in -ma.

§4.1.6 Schizaphonic Nouns

Schizaphonic nouns are the monosyllabic equivalent of bi- or polysyllabic consonantal nouns. Such nouns are monosyllabic and end in a consonant. They are called schizaphonic because the asematic form is a truncated or shortened form of the underlying form, and when schizaphonic nouns are found in their sematic form, they become bisyllabic and consonantal. For example, sġoan ‘small cut’ has the sematic form sġoangon. Schizaphonic nouns differ from monosyllabic consonantal nouns in that they have a word-final consonant in the sematic form. For example, ġỉn ‘small box’ is a monosyllabic consonantal noun and it has the sematic form ġỉdna (ending in a vowel), while the schizaphonic noun ƛẻn 'cuff' has a sematic form in ƛẻngen (ending in a consonant). Schizaphonic nouns form their asematic plural based on their underlying form instead of their asematic form, although without a word-final consonant (which is in fact a marker of the sematic form), which is unique to this declension. The word sġoan ‘small cut’ has the asematic plural form sġoangogi, not *sġoangi as one would expect from a consonantal noun. In contrast, ġỉn ‘small box’ has the asematic plural form ġỉnkki (or ġỉngi).

§4.1.7 Teleutophonic Nouns

Teleutophonic nouns are nouns whose last syllable changes regularly in the sematic form. Such nouns are usually derived nouns whose derivational ending has a specific sematic form. For example, nouns derived from verbs in -u are teleutophonic nouns, because they all have a sematic form in -oga (linnu ‘word’ ⟫ lỉdnoga).

§4.1.8 Apocoptic Nouns

A subgroup of trisyllabic nouns are called apocoptic nouns. These nouns undergo apocope or deletion of their last syllable in the sematic form, meaning that they go from a trisyllabic asematic form to a consonant-final or geminate final bisyllabic form. For example, oįula ‘dwarf birch’ undergoes apocope in the sematic form (along with other diaphonic changes) to yield ỏįįul.

§4.1.9 Enantiophones, Parantiophones & Paromophones

In nominal declensions, the vowel involved in the formation of sematic forms can change in three ways.

When a last vowel of a noun in its sematic form has the opposite polarity (or is -y-, which is not affected by polarity inversion) of the stressed nucleus and is tense, it is called an enantiophone. All heterorganic symphonic nouns end in an enantiophone (-i, -u or -y), for example dimmi ‘(older) brother’ has the sematic form dỉmu.

When a last vowel of a noun has the opposite polarity in its sematic form to its asematic form but is lax, as in all homorganic symphonic nouns, it is called an parantiophone. The only difference between enantiophones and parantiophones is that enantiophones are tense, while paromophones are lax. For example, sallįa ‘lakeshore’ has the sematic form sảlįen, where -e- is a parantiophone.

Lastly the last vowel of a noun in its sematic form has the same polarity as that of the asematic vowel but is lax (-e-, -o- or -ů-), it is called a paromophone. All heterorganic antiphonic nouns end in a paromophone, for example bakvi ‘house’ ⟫ boagve.

frontbackfront-rounded
enantiophone-u--i--y-
parantiophone-o--e--ů-
paromophone-e--o--ů-

§4.1.10 Declension Polarity

The formation of oblique cases from the sematic form follows what is called declension polarity, of which there are three main types – a declension pattern can have amphiphonic polarity (-i-/-e-), opisthophonic polarity (-u-/-o-/-a-), prosthophonic polarity (-y-/-ů-). For example, front polarity nouns have en illative in -et while back polarity nouns will have -ot and prosthophonic nouns have -ůt. A polarity series is a set of endings with a specific declension polarity. For example, the illative -et is part of the front polarity series of declensional endings. Declensions are said to be propolar when the alignment of declension suffixes aligns with the polarity of the root nucleus, or contrapolar when it does not.

amphiphonic declensionopisthophonic declensionprosthophonic declension
asematicki-nikf
keniḳ
'burial mound'
kjuLkuc
kįulkuṡ
'wolf cub'
aima-c-
aimyts
'index finger'
sematicki-ni-hfa
keneġva
kjuLku-c--a
kįulkotṡa
aimu--fa
aimůva
inessiveki-nimmit
kenimmit
kjuLku-c--imut
kįulkotṡimut
aima-mmit
aimymmit
illativeki-ni-hfu-t
keneġvot
kjuLku-c--i-t
kįulkotṡet
aimu--fu--t
aimůvůt
elativeki-ni-hfunnit
keneġvunnit
kjuLku-c--innit
kįulkotṡinnit
aimi-a-nnit
aimeynnit
comitativeki-nikkut
kenikkut
kjuLkuccut
kįulkuṡṡut
aima-c-cit
aimyttsit
essiveki-nic-
kenits
kjuLkuc-
kįulkuts
aima-c-ca
aimyttsa

Additionally, amphiphonic and opisthophonic polarities can undergo prosthothesis, whereby any ending containing -u- or -o- become front-rounded:

prosthothetic
amphiphonic declension
prosthothetic
opisthophonic declension
asematicg-u--i-lgic
ġůelgiṡ
'small trout'
p-u--lt-as
bůldas
'ball'
sematicg-u--i-lgi-c--a
ġůelgetṡa
p-u--lt-a
bůlda
inessiveg-u--i-lgi-c--a-mit
ġůelgetṡymit
(-umit ⟫ -ymit)
p-u--lt-ima-t
bůldimyt
(-imut ⟫ -imyt)
illativeg-u--i-lgi-c--u--t
ġůelgetṡůt
(-ot ⟫ -ůt)
p-u--lt-i-t
bůldet
elativeg-u--i-lgi-c--a-nnit
ġůelgetṡynnit
(-unnit ⟫ -ynnit)
p-u--lt-innit
bůldinnit
comitativeg-u--i-lgiccit
ġůelgiṡṡit
p-u--lt-a-ssa-t
bůldyssyt
(-ussut ⟫ -yssyt)
essiveg-u--i-lgic-
ġůelgits
p-u--lt-ac-
bůldats

§4.1.11 Case Formation

Each sematic case has a few number of forms that can be deduced from the overall declension of a noun. For example, the elative plural has the ending -Vngit (-ingit, -ungit, -yngit) or in some cases -VVngit (-eungit, -uingit, -eůngit). Below is a list of the various forms, abstracted to apply to all possible declension patterns, for the sematic cases. Note that the endings for the sematic case (the common form to the patientive, accusative and genitive case) may be followed by a consonant.

Some rare cases are not given here, including the abessive in -(v)uġġit and the ornative in -ussit/-issit. The former is derived from an older form of the comitative in -(v)en/-(v)on/-(v)ůn, which has been replaced by the originally viative case endings in -(C/g/kk)-it/-ut.

sematic case endings
singularplural
amphiphonicopisthophonicprosthophonicamphiphonicopisthophonicprosthophonic
sematicshort-i-
-e-
-u-
-o-
-a-
-y-
-ů-
-ut
-yt
-it
-at
-yt
long-ỉ-ủ
-ả
-ỷ
-eů
-eut
-eyt
-ủt
-ỷt
-uit
-ủt
-ỷt
-eyt
-ỷt
inessiveshort-imut
-imyt
-umit
-ymit
-ymit-isit-usut
-ysyt
-ysyt
long-(i)mmut
-(i)mmyt
-(u)mmit
-(y)mmit
-(y)mmit-aissit
-oissit
-uissit
-eyssit
-eussut
-eyssyt
-iussut
-ỷssyt
-eyssyt
-ỷssyt
complex-ỉbmit-ủbmut
-ỷbmyt
-ỷbmit
fusional-(i)ṃṃut
-(i)ṃṃyt
-(u)ṃṃut
-(y)ṃṃyt
-(y)ṃṃit
illativeshort-et-ot
-ůt
-ůt-ittit-uttut
-yttyt
-yttyt
complex-oit
-ait
-iut
-eůt
-eůt-ỉttit
-aittit
-eittit
-uittit
-ủttut
-ỷttyt
-auttut
-ayttyt
-ỷttyt
-eyttyt
fusional-iktit
-endit
-indit
-ildit
-irdit
-istit
-uktut
-ondut
-undut
-uldut
-urdut
-ustut
-yktyt
-yndyt
-ůndyt
-yldyt
-yrdyt
-ystyt
elativeshort-innit-unnit
-ynnit
-ynnit-ingit-ungit-yngit
complex-oinnit
-ainnit
-uinnit
-ůinnit
-ỉnnnit
-eunnit
-eynnit
-eynnit-oingit
-aingit
-uingit
-ỷngit
-eungit
-eyngit
-iungit
-eůngit
-ỷngit
-eyngit
-eůngit
comitativeshort-igut
-igyt
-ugit
-ygit
-ygit-ein
-eun
-eyn
-uin
-ůin
-ůin
-ỷn
-eůn
-eyn
long-ikkut
-ikkyt
-ukkit
-ykkit
-ykkit
fusional-ccut
-ccyt
-ccit-ccit
short-ts-ts-ts
essivelong-tsa-ttset-ttsot
-ttsůt
-ttsůt
§4.1.11.1 Sematic Case Endings
singularplural shortplural geminate
-i/-e(n)/-ỉ-it/-ut-ỉt/-ủt
-u/-a/-o(n)/-ủ/-ả/-ỏ-ut/-it-ủt/-ỉt/-ảt
-y/-ů(n)/-ỷ/-eů-yt/-it-ỷt

-C

The sematic form of a noun, its marked form, is the form from which all cases except the essive and the unmarked forms are derived. The sematic form is the surface form of both the patientive and the accusative as well as the genitive (though in some cases with slight modifications). For monosyllabic nouns, the singular sematic case is usually a bisyllabic form with either a geminated consonant (in the case of consonantal nouns) or a glide (in the case of monosyllabic diphthong and geminate nouns).

asematicsematic
sg pl
bįuo ‘little boy’bįuįįubįuįįitmonosyllabic diphthongal
hỏ‘ember’hoįįohoįįitmonosyllabic geminal
tṡỉt‘little bird’tṡỉddatṡỉddutmonosyllabic consonantal
tsỉk‘splinter’tsỉggentsỉggutmonosyllabic schizaphonic

For non-consonantal bisyllabic nouns, homorganicity triggers the appearance of a final -n, while consonantal nouns are more varied in their sematic forms. Non-consonantal bisyllabic nouns that are symphonic will undergo polarity inversion (back nuclei become fronted and the final vowel becomes fronted as well, and vice-versa for front-nuclei nouns), while antiphonic nouns are propolar, meaning front nuclei undergo front apophony and back nuclei undergo back apophony, while final vowels are relaxed. Trisyllabic nouns are either apocoptic, meaning they become bisyllabic in the sematic form, or they may be consonantal or teleutophonic, in which case they have a set sematic form determined by their last syllable in the asematic form. Polysyllabic nouns are either teleutophonic or treated as N+2 or N+3 syllable nouns. In the case of consonantal nouns in -t, the plural sematic endings are -eut/-uit/-eyt.

mavvu‘meat’mảvenmảvitbisyllabic homorganic symphonic
soaƛƛi‘fish’soaƛensoaƛutbisyllabic homorganic antiphonic
kvoḷḷa‘cloud’kvůaƛƛikvůaƛƛitbisyllabic heterorganic symphonic
sukƛu‘whale’seyġƛiseyġƛitbisyllabic heterorganic antiphonic
iri‘bark’ỉrronỉrrutenteraphonic symphonic
alli‘sediment’oalenoalutenteraphonic antiphonic
ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủluitbisyllabic consonantal
halavut‘custom’halavonhalavuittrisyllabic consonantal
kanarġa‘corner’koadnarkoadnorittrisyllabic apocoptic
amaġat‘peninsula’ảbmảảbmỉttrisyllabic apocoptic

The plural ending of the sematic case is -vt or in some cases -vːt. The vowel is contrapolar to the asematic form if it ends in a vowel, and normally propolar to the series of the singular sematic form if the noun does not end in a vowel or is apocoptic (which itself is usually contrapolar, making it therefore contrapolar).

§4.1.11.2 Inessive Case Endings
singularplural shortplural longplural geminate
-(i)(m)mut-isit-eussut/-eyssyt-iussut
-(u)(m)mit/-(a)(m)mut-usut-uissit/-aissit-uissit/-aissit
-(y)(m)mit-ysyt-eyssyt-ỷssyt

The singular inessive case endings are -imut/-imyt, -umit and -ymit (prosthothetic). It is propolar to the sematic form. There also exists a truncative series found in various cases, -mmut/-mmyt (with front vowels) and -mmit (with back vowels or front-rounded vowels) and in a handful of cases, -ṃṃut/-ṃṃit/-ṃṃyt. Inessive singular endings can only appear following a tense vowel, and in the case of truncative endings, this may affect the nature of a root vowel.

Truncative singular forms appear in the following cases:

1) with homorganic and enteraphonic nouns whose sematic form ends in -n:

mavvu‘meat’mảvenmảvimmyt
iri‘bark’ỉrronỉrrummit

2) with monosyllabic consonantal nouns whose sematic form ends in -ỏ or -eů (nouns in -l, -r):

loal‘tailbone’loaḷḷỏloaḷḷummit
hoar‘tail feather’hoaṛṛỏhoaṛṛummit

3) with monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -s, though with devoicing and deletion of -h-:

sġias‘dried grass’sġiaṃṃit

4) with monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts and -n with deletion of the root final consonant:

heits‘root burl’heiḍḍaheimmit
rỉn‘limit, edge’rỉbmarỉmmit

5) with schizaphonic nouns:

tsỉk‘splinter’tsỉggentsỉggimmyt
6) with bi- and trisyllabic consonantal nouns in -t, -k, -ḳ, -l and -r (alternatively non-truncative), non-contracting nouns in -s (with devoicing to -ṃṃut/-ṃṃit), -ts and -n:
ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủlummit
vỏskvis‘male elk’vỏskvehavỏskviṃṃut~vỏskvehimut
iįįil‘sugar’iįįeƛaiįįimmut~iįįeƛimut
ġaġuts‘little brother’ġaġovaġaġummut

7) with apocoptic nouns in -n, -l, -s and -r (alternatively non-truncative), -t and :

linnubma‘poem’lỉdnunlỉdnummit
bįuƛƛuƛƛu‘little boy’bįủƛulbįủƛummit~bįủƛolimut
hįiḷḷiryt‘witch’hįỉƛƛirhįỉƛƛimmit~hįỉƛƛerumit
nįubbusat‘thistle’nįủpusnįủpummut~nįủpossimut
kảḷḷeddit‘highland’kảƛƛitkảƛƛimmit
pỉƛƛivi‘pine forest’pỉƛỉpỉƛimmit

The plural inessive endings are -isit, -usut, -ysyt and in some cases -eussut/-eyssyt (or -eyssit), -uissit and -eyssyt in the same polarity as singular forms. Forms in -eyssyt and -eyssit can be used interchangeably. The plural long forms appear in the following cases:

1) with bi- and triconsonantal nouns in -t and front-aligning nouns in -ts (-eussut or -eyssyt):

ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủluissit
ṡengyts‘maiden, bride’ṡengůvaṡengeyssyt

2) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -t:

ƛaiƛƛattit‘sledgehammer’ƛoiƛatƛoiƛuissit

Special geminate forms are found with nouns whose sematic singular ends in a geminate vowel. Such forms are -iussit, -uissit or -aissit and -ỷssyt.

3) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt, -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt, -ehhit/-ohhut/-ůhhyt and nouns in -at with special forms in -iussut, -uissit/-aissit and -ỷssyt:
amaġat'peninsula'ảbmảảbmaissit
ikoġġu‘defect’ỉkkủỉkkuissit
haluva‘tradition’hoallủhoalluissit
nennedůt‘friendship’nennỷtnennỷssyt
tammohut‘size’tammủtammuissit
ṃuohhut‘warmth’ṃuohủṃuohuissit
nįalkkat‘hook’nįoalkavanįoalkoissit
§4.1.11.3 Illative Case Endings
singularplural shortplural longplural geminate
-et/-iut-uttut-ủttut/-auttut-ủttut/-auttut
-ot/-uit/-ait-ittit-eittit-ỉttit
-ůt/-eůt-yttyt-eyttyt-ỷttyt

The singular illative case endings are -et/-ot/-ůt and in the plural -ittit/-uttut/-yttyt or -eittit/-ủttut/-ỷttyt or -eyttyt. The plural endings have opposite polarity to their singular forms. Where ever a noun has a long inessive plural form, it also has a long illative plural form. Unlike the other oblique cases, the illative is propolar with the sematic case in the singular, but contrapolar in the plural.

1) with bi- and triconsonantal nouns in -t and front-aligning nouns in -ts (-eyttyt):

ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủlủttut
ṡengyts‘maiden, bride’ṡengůvaṡengeyttyt

2) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -t:

ƛaiƛƛattit‘sledgehammer’ƛoiƛatƛoiƛủttut

Special geminate forms are found with nouns whose sematic singular ends in a geminate vowel. Such forms are -ỉttit, -ủttut or -auttut/-ayttyt and -ỷttyt.

3) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt, -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt, -ehhit/-ohhut/-ůhhyt and nouns in -at with special forms in -ỉttit, -ủttut/-auttut/-ayttyt and -ỷttyt:
amaġat'peninsula'ảbmảảbmayttyt
ikoġġu‘defect’ỉkkủỉkkủttut
pỉƛƛivi‘pine forest’pỉƛỉpỉƛỉttit
haluva‘tradition’hoallủhoallủttut
nennedůt‘friendship’nennỷtnennỷttyt
tammohut‘size’tammủtammủttut
ṃuohhut‘warmth’ṃuohủṃuohủttut
nįalkkat‘hook’nįoalkavanįoalkauttut
§4.1.11.4 Elative Case Endings
singularplural shortplural longplural geminate
-innit/-eunnit-ingit-eungit/-eyngit-iungit
-unnit/-uinnit-ungit-uingit/-aingit-uingit/-aingit
-ynnit/-eynnit-yngit-eůngit-ỷngit

The elative case has singular forms in -innit/-unnit/-ynnit and in some cases -eunnit/-uinnit/-eynnit and plural forms in -ingit/-ungit/-yngit as well as long forms in -eungit~-eyngit/-uingit/-eůngit and geminate forms in -iungit, -uingit or -aingit and -ỷngit which mirror the inessive forms. There is no alteration in consonant quality like in the inessive, but the pattern is otherwise identical. Like the inessive, the elative endings have the same polarity as the sematic ending. The singular forms have alternative short forms in -ỉn/-ủn/-ỷn or -eun/-uin/-eyn which are required with possessive affixes and often have a more abstract meaning. Short forms are commonly found in adverbs and postpositions, and are found in numerous idioms. In addition, when the elative directly precedes a second noun also in a locative case, the short forms are heavily favoured, for example in gaġvỉlįuin ỉlįuit ‘from generation to generation’, nįuoggossỉn teubmosset ‘from stern to bow’ and pỉįủn teulpṃot ‘from dawn till dusk’.

1) with bi- and triconsonantal nouns in -t and front-aligning nouns in -ts (-eungit or -eyngit):

ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủluingit
ṡengyts‘maiden, bride’ṡengůvaṡengeyngit

2) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -t:

ƛaiƛƛattit‘sledgehammer’ƛoiƛatƛoiƛuingit

Special geminate forms are found with nouns whose sematic singular ends in a geminate vowel. Such forms are -iungit, -uingit or -aingit and -ỷngit.

3) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt, -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt, -ehhit/-ohhut/-ůhhyt and nouns in -at with special forms in -iungit, -uingit/-aingit and -ỷngyt:
amaġat'peninsula'ảbmảảbmaingit
ikoġġu‘defect’ỉkkủỉkkuingit
pỉƛƛivi‘pine forest’pỉƛỉpỉƛiungit
haluva‘tradition’hoallủhoalluingit
nennedůt‘friendship’nennỷtnennỷngyt
tammohut‘size’tammủtammuingit
ṃuohhut‘warmth’ṃuohủṃuohuingit
nįalkkat‘hook’nįoalkavanįoalkoingit
§4.1.11.5 Comitative Case Endings
singularplural shortplural longplural geminate
-igut/-(i)kkut-ein-eun-iun
-igyt/-(i)kkyt-ein-eyn-iůn
-ugit/-(u)kkit-uin
-agit/-(a)kkit-ain
-ygit/-(y)kkit-ůin-eůn-ỷn

-CCit

-CCut

-CCyt

The comitative endings are perhaps the most complex of the case system in Pine. In the singular, they mirror the truncation of the inessive, such that wherever a long inessive ending is found, a long comitative is also found, and in the cases of various consonantal stems, a geminate form is found in the singular – with the notable exception that -ṃṃit/-ṃṃut does not correspond to a long form in the comitative. In the plural, the comitative distinguishes short, long and geminate plural forms like the three locative cases. The comitative differs from the inessive in one important manner: the front-rounded forms in -igyt or -ikkyt (or -ccyt) are only found with a stem containing a front-rounded vowel, whereas the inessive uses the front-rounded forms -imyt or -immyt with any front vowel. If any non-front vowel (including -a-) comes between the comitative ending and the noun, front-rounding does not occur.

The long truncative forms in the singular are found in the following cases:

1) with homorganic and enteraphonic nouns whose sematic form ends in -n:

mavvu‘meat’mảvenmảvikkyt
iri‘bark’ỉrronỉrrukkit

2) with monosyllabic consonantal nouns whose sematic form ends in -ỏ or -eů (nouns in -l, -r):

loal‘tailbone’loaḷḷỏloaḷḷukkit
hoar‘tail feather’hoaṛṛỏhoaṛṛukkit

3) with simple monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -s:

sġias‘dried grass’sġiahikkut

4) with monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts and -n:

heits‘root burl’heiḍḍaheihukkit
rỉn‘limit, edge’rỉbmarỉbmukkit

5) with schizaphonic nouns:

tsỉk‘splinter’tsỉggentsỉggikkut
6) with consonantal nouns (bi- and triconsonantal, including apocoptic nouns but excluding apocoptic nouns in -ġ-) and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt as -cc-it/-cc-ut/-cc-yt where -cc- is the sematic word-final consonant after gemination (or in the case of bisyllabic consonantal nouns, the asematic word-final consonant), although parallel non-truncative forms are also possible. Note that forms in -a-c-c- become -u-c-c-/-y-c-c-/
ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlonḷủluttit
ḷinkkas‘boat’ḷinkkaḷinkkussit
taltaṡ‘young elk’taltotṡataltuṡṡit
vỏskvis‘male elk’vỏskvehavỏskvissut
iįįil‘sugar’iįįeƛaiįįillut
ġaġuts‘little brother’ġaġovaġaġuttsit
linnubma‘poem’lỉdnunlỉdnunnit
bįuƛƛuƛƛu‘little boy’bįủƛulbįủƛullit
hįiḷḷiryt‘witch’hįỉƛƛirhįỉƛƛirrut
nįubbusat‘thistle’nįủpusnįủpussit
kảḷḷeddit‘highland’kảƛƛitkảƛƛittyt
pỉƛƛivi‘pine forest’pỉƛỉpỉƛikkut
7) with apocoptic nouns in -ġ-, teleutophonic nouns in -u, -at and -e(h)hit/-o(h)hut/-ů(h)hyt (all nouns whose sematic form ends in a geminate) as well as nouns in -ϕi and -at (which have either -akkit or -ukkit) . Note that -ả- changes to -y-kkit here.
hamaġi‘armor’hảbmảhảbmykkit
linnu‘word’lỉdnogalỉdnukkit
iƛƛůhyt‘beauty’iƛƛỷiƛƛykkit
ṡitġat‘molar’ṡỉġġavaṡỉġġakkit~ṡỉġġukkit

For the plural comitative endings, long forms are used in a pattern that mirrors that of the inessive:

1) with bi- and triconsonantal nouns in -t including apocoptic nouns in -t:

tṡettṡet‘old man’tṡettṡentṡettṡeun
ṡengyts‘maiden, bride’ṡengůvaṡengeyn

2) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -t:

kảḷḷeddit‘highland’kảƛƛitkảƛƛeyn

3) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -ġ- and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt and -e(h)hit/-o(h)hut/-ů(h)hyt, geminate forms are used:

gillįivu‘downpour’gỉlįỉgỉlįiun
nennedůt‘friendship’nennỷtnennỷn
kảḷḷehit‘height’kảḷḷỉkảḷḷiůn

Special geminate forms are found with nouns whose sematic singular ends in a geminate vowel. Such forms are -iun, -uin or -ain and -ỷn.

1) with triconsonantal apocoptic nouns in -ġ- and teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-důt, -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt, -ehhit/-ohhut/-ůhhyt and nouns in -at with special forms in -iun, -uin/-ain and -ỷn:
amaġat'peninsula'ảbmảảbmain
ikoġġu‘defect’ỉkkủỉkkuin
pỉƛƛivi‘pine forest’pỉƛỉpỉƛiun
haluva‘tradition’hoallủhoalluin
nennedůt‘friendship’nennỷtnennỷn
tammohut‘size’tammủtammuin
ṃuohhut‘warmth’ṃuohủṃuohuin
nįalkkat‘hook’nįoalkavanįoalkoin
§4.1.11.6 Essive Case Endings
singularplural
-its/-ỉts-ittset/-ỉttset
-uts/-ủts-uttsot/-ủttsot
-ats/-ảts-attsot/-ảttset
-yts/-ỷts-yttsůt/-ỷttsůt
-c-(t)ts(a)-c-ttset
-c-(t)ts(a)-c-ttsot
-c-(t)ts(a)-c-ttsůt

The essive case is the only non-asematic case that is formed on the bases of the asematic ending of a noun. There are three sets of essive cases: short and long forms as well as a consonantal form in -c-ts or -c-tsa in the singular. where long forms have a geminate vowel. Short forms are found with all adjectival roots, all non-consonantal monosyllabic nouns and

The consonantal forms in -ts, -tsa or -ttsa are used in the following cases:

1) with consonantal monosyllabic nouns (including schizaphonic nouns), -tsa is used. Plural forms are long. Nouns in -s and -ts have the long form -ttsa.
rỉn‘limit’rỉntsarỉnttset
sṇįỉr‘spark’sṇįỉrtsasṇįỉrttset
ƛẻn‘cuff’ƛẻntsaƛẻnttset
heits‘root burl’heittsaheittset
hủs‘cold air’hủttsahủttsot
2) with bi- and trisyllabic consonantal nouns in -t (including teleutophonic nouns in -t such as -dot, -ohut and -at), -k, -ḳ, -s, -ṡ and -n, the short form in -ts is used in the singular, but is lengthened in the plural to -ttset/-ttsot/-ttsůt:
ḷủlut‘language’ḷủlutsḷủluttsot
giṡkin‘salmon’giṡkintsgiṡkinttset
nennedůt‘friendship’nennedůtsnennedůttsůt

3) with bi- and trisyllabic consonantal nouns in -l, -r and -ts, the form -tsa is used in the singular:

ṡengyts‘maiden, bride’ṡengyttsaṡengyttsůt
ussul‘smoked fish’ussultsaussulttsot
ġyġġyr‘swan’ġyġġyrtsaġyġġyrttsůt

4) with trisyllabic nouns ending in a vowel, -ts is used (without gemination):

kyƛƛyƛƛy‘little girl’kyƛƛyƛƛytskyƛƛyƛƛyttsůt
kuḍḍura‘male bear’kuḍḍuratskuḍḍurattsot

All bisyllabic nominal stems ending in a vowel have the geminated essive case endings:

niṡki‘person’niṡkỉtsniṡkỉttset
soaƛƛi‘fish’soaƛƛỉtssoaƛƛỉttset

§4.2 Monosyllabic Nouns

Monosyllabic nouns have a total of seven regular declension patterns: dipthongal (symphonic or antiphonic), geminal (front or back), consonantal and schizaphonic (symphonic or antiphonic). Monosyllabic nouns lack the homorganic/heterorganic distinction of bisyllabic nouns simply because they have a single syllable in their asematic form.

§4.2.1 Monosyllabic Diphthongal Nouns

Monosyllabic diphthongal nouns are nouns whose asematic form is monosyllabic and which end in a diphthong. They represent a small portion of Pine nouns and are comparatively simple to decline. There are two declension patterns for monosyllabic nouns – if both components of the diphthong have the same polarity (both front or both back vowels), then it is said to be symphonic (sometimes called homopolar), while if the diphthong consists of a front and a back vowel, then it is said to be antiphonic (sometimes called heteropolar). Symphonic and antiphonic nouns decline nearly identically.

Monosyllabic diphthongal nouns form their sematic form by introducing a geminate glide, either -įį- or -vv- after the first component of the diphthong, replacing the second element (and thus causing loss of the diphthong). The glide is polarly opposite to the diphthong if it is symphonic (front diphthongs have -vv- and back dipthongs have -įį-), while the final vowel is enantiophonic. The opposite is true of antiphonic diphthongs – the glide is of the same polarity (-įį- for front diphthongs and -vv- for back dipthongs), while the final vowel is paromophonic.

For example, tey ‘egg’ is symphonic and has front polarity, which means the glide will be -vv- and the final vowel augment will be enantiophonic (-i-), to yield tevvi. The word iu ‘forefather’ is antiphonic and has front polarity, meaning the glide will be -įį- and the final vowel augment will be paromophonic (-e-) to yield iįįe.

monosyllabic diphthongal sematic formation
symphonicantiphonic
frontbackfrontback
asematic diphthongei ey ie ay ůe ůa aiau uo eu ia iu oi ui
sematic glide-vv--įį--įį--vv-
sematic final vowel-i, -y-u-e, -ů-o

Below are examples to illustrate this pattern:

monosyllabic diphthongal symphonic

asematicsematic
geigevvi‘snout’
hiehivvi‘mound’
ieivvi‘crack’
teytevvi‘egg’
hįůahįůvvy‘passed relative’
tsautsaįįu‘lamb’
bįuobįuįįu‘little boy, male infant’

monosyllabic diphthongal antiphonic

asematicsematic
eueįįe‘scar’
sƛeusƛeįįe‘disobedient dog, child (pejorative)’
iuiįįe‘forefather’
ƛiaƛiįįe‘dandruff’
kuikuvvo‘edge (of blade)’
ṃoiṃoavvo‘little girl, female infant’

The declension of oblique cases and the sematic plural as a three-way polarity distinction:

monosyllabic diphthongal oblique cases
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
sematic-i/-e-u/-o-y/-ů-ut-it-yt
inessive-imut
-imyt
-umit-ymit-isit-usut-ysyt
illative-et-ot-ůt-uttut-ittit-yttyt
elative-innit-unnit-ynnit-ingit-ungit-yngit
comitative-igut-ugit-ygit-ein-uin-ůin
essiveØ-tsØ-ttsetØ-ttsotØ-ttsůt

Forms marked with Ø- indicate that the asematic form is the base for the formation of the declined case. This is true of the essive singular and plural and the comitative plural.

§4.2.1.1 Monosyllabic Diphthongal Symphonic
bįuo bįuįįusingularplural

‘little boy’

asematicbįuobįuogi
sematicbįuįįubįuįįit
inessivebįuįįumitbįuįįusut
illativebįuįįotbįuįįittit
elativebįuįįunnitbįuįįungit
comitativebįuįįugitbįuįįuin
essivebįuotsbįuottsot
tey tevvisingularplural

‘egg’

asematicteyteygi
sematictevvitevvut
inessivetevvimyttevvisit
illativetevvettevvuttut
elativetevvinnittevvingit
comitativetevviguttevvein
essiveteytsteyttset
hįůa hįůvvysingularplural

‘passed relative’

asematichįůahįůagi
sematichįůvvyhįůvvyt
inessivehįůvvymithįůvvysyt
illativehįůvvůthįůvvyttyt
elativehįůvvynnithįůvvyngit
comitativehįůvvygithįůvvůin
essivehįůatshįůattsůt
§4.2.1.2 Monosyllabic Diphthongal Antiphonic
eu eįįesingularplural

‘scar’

asematiceueugi
sematiceįįeeįįut
inessiveeįįimyteįįisit
illativeeįįeteįįuttut
elativeeįįinniteįįingit
comitativeeįįiguteįįein
essiveeutseuttset
kui kuvvosingularplural

‘edge’

asematickuikuigi
sematickuvvokuvvit
inessivekuvvumitkuvvusut
illativekuvvotkuvvittit
elativekuvvunnitkuvvungit
comitativekuvvugitkuvvuin
essivekuitskuittsot

§4.2.2 Monosyllabic Geminal Nouns

Monosyllabic geminal nouns are nouns whose asematic form is monosyllabic and ends in a geminate vowel. Their declension is identical to that of monosyllabic diphthongal nouns is nearly identical in most respects except two – the geminate vowel is shortened, and there is no distinction between symphony and antiphony – all monosyllabic geminal nouns decline like symphonic monosyllabic diphthongal nouns. Both and oa are degeminated to a.

front degemination

i
e
y
ů
a

back gemination

oaa
o
u

Otherwise, the declension of monosyllabic geminal nouns is the same as that of monosyllabic diphthongal nouns:

monosyllabic geminal sematic formation
frontback
asematic geminateỉ ẻ ỷ eů ảoa ỏ ủ
sematic glide-vv--įį-
sematic final vowel-i, -y-u

monosyllabic diphthongal front

asematicsematic
ṃeůṃůvvy‘sputum’
evvi‘small plant’
hįỉhįivvi‘gum disease’
yvvy‘ice’

monosyllabic diphthongal back

asematicsematic
hỏhoįįu‘embers’
ṇįủṇįuįįu‘visible/condensed breath’
hįỏhįoįįu‘cut (in wood from axe or knife)’
lįỏlįoįįu‘pus’

Like monosyllabic diphthongal nouns, the monosyllabic geminal noun declension has a three-way polarity distinction for oblique cases and the sematic plural.

monosyllabic geminal oblique cases
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
sematic-i-u-y-ut-it-yt
inessive-imut
-imyt
-umit-ymit-isit-usut-ysyt
illative-et-ot-ůt-uttut-ittit-yttyt
elative-innit-unnit-ynnit-ingit-ungit-yngit
comitative-igut-ugit-ygit-ein-uin-ůin
essiveØ-tsØ-ttsetØ-ttsotØ-ttsůt

Forms marked with Ø- indicate that the asematic form is the base for the formation of the declined case. This is true of the essive singular and plural and the comitative plural.

§4.2.2.1 Monosyllabic Geminal Back
lįỏ lįoįįusingularplural

‘pus’

asematiclįỏlįỏgi
sematiclįoįįulįoįįit
inessivelįoįįumitlįoįįusut
illativelįoįįotlįoįįittit
elativelįoįįunnitlįoįįungit
comitativelįoįįugitlįoįįuin
essivelįỏtslįỏttsot
ṇįủ ṇįuįįusingularplural

’visible breath’

asematicṇįủṇįủgi
sematicṇįuįįuṇįuįįit
inessiveṇįuįįumitṇįuįįusut
illativeṇįuįįotṇįuįįittit
elativeṇįuįįunnitṇįuįįungit
comitativenįuįįugitṇįuįįuin
essiveṇįủtsṇįủttsot
§4.2.2.2 Monosyllabic Geminal Front
evvisingularplural

‘small plant’

asematicẻgi
sematicevvievvut
inessiveevvimytevvisit
illativeevvetevvuttut
elativeevvinnitevvingit
comitativeevvigutevvein
essiveẻtsẻttset
hįỉ hįivvisingularplural

‘gum disease’

asematichįỉhįỉgi
sematichįivvihįivvut
inessivehįivvimythįivvisit
illativehįivvethįivvuttut
elativehįivvinnithįivvingit
comitativehįivviguthįivvein
essivehįỉtshįỉttset

§4.2.3 Monosyllabic Consonantal Declensions

Monosyllabic nouns ending in a consonant and whose sematic form ends in a vowel are termed monosyllabic consonantal nouns. Unlike other declension types, consonantal declension paradigms are entirely dependent on the nature of final consonant. As such, an asematic consonantal ending will have one or more corresponding sematic form. It is not always possible to tell exactly what kind of ending a consonantal noun will take in the sematic form, which makes these paradigms more difficult to memorise.

Pine nouns may end in -t -l -r -s -ṡ -ts -n, -k and -ḳ in the eastern dialects, but western dialects replace word-final dorsals (-k and -ḳ) by -t.

§4.2.3.1 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -t

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -t have a coronal sematic form in -dda. In western dialects, the -k and -ḳ consonantal declensions have an asematic form in -t. Like all monosyllabic consonantal nouns, there is only a single declension polarity.

Examples of monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -t include:

asematicsematic
ƛỏtƛỏdda‘earthworm’
gįoatgįoadda‘underside of ski’
tṡỉttṡỉdda‘small bird’
ṡoitṡoidda‘rib cage’

There are three nouns in Pine that have special sematic form in -tva: důat, důatva ‘bird’s nest’, kįỉt, kįỉtva ‘reindeer calf’ and ṛeit, ṛeitva ‘serrated blade’.

The declension pattern for monosyllabic consonantal nouns has a single front polarity series. The asematic plural has two forms, which are both acceptable, one in -ttṡi and one in -kki.

monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -t
singularplural
asematic-t-ttṡi, -kki
sematic-dda-ddut / -ddyt
inessive-ddimyt
-ddimut
-ddisit
illative-ddet-dduttut / -ddyttyt
elative-ddinnit-ddingit
comitative-ddigut / -ddigyt-ddein
essive-ts-ttset
tsġeůt tsġeůddasingularplural

‘skeleton’

asematictsġeůttsġeůttṡi
sematictsġeůddatsġeůddyt
inessivetsġeůddimyttsġeůddisit
illativetsġeůddettsġeůddyttyt
elativetsġeůddinnittsġeůddingit
comitativetsġeůddigyttsġeůddein
essivetsġeůts tsġeůttset
ƛỏt ƛỏddasingularplural

‘earthworm’

asematicƛỏtƛỏtṡi
sematicƛỏddaƛỏddut
inessiveƛỏddimutƛỏddisit
illativeƛỏddetƛỏdduttut
elativeƛỏddinnitƛỏddingit
comitativeƛỏddugitƛỏddein
essiveƛỏtsƛỏttset
§4.2.3.2 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -k/-

Monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -k (dorsal) and - (labiodorsal) are found in eastern dialects, whereas western dialects decline them as monosyllabic -t nouns. Nouns with an asematic form in -k have a sematic form in -gga, while labialised nouns in - have -kva. Dorsal nouns have a front polarity series while labiodorsals have a back polarity series. The illative plural has a short form in -ġtut/-ġtyt for dorsal nouns.

dorsal

asematicsematic
gvỏkgvỏgga‘warm weather that drives reindeer to ice’
ṃeykṃeygga‘crane fly’
ḷeukḷeugga‘path in snow that is hardly visible’

labiodorsal

asematicsematic
hįuoḳhįuokva‘hook-shaped needle’
tṇủḳtṇủkva‘surface (of water)’
kvỉḳkvỉkva‘bug, midge’
monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -k/-ḳ
singularplural
dorsallabiodorsaldorsallabiodorsal
asematic-k-ḳ-kki
sematic-gga-kva-ggut / -ggyt-kvit
inessive-ggimut
-ggimyt
-kvumit-ggisit-kvusut
illative-gget-kvot-gguttut / -ggyttyt
-ġtut / -ġtyt
-kvippit
elative-gginnit-kvunnit-gingit-kvungit
comitative-ggigut-ggugit / -ggygit-ggein-kvuin
essive-ts-ttset-ttsot
§4.2.3.2.1 Monosyllabic -k Nouns
toak toaggasingularplural

‘tall and slander person’

asematictoaktoakki
sematictoaggatoaggut
inessivetoaggimuttoaggisit
illativetoaggettoagguttut ~ toaġtut
elativetoagginnittoaggingit
comitativetoaggiguttoaggein
essivetoatstoattset
§4.2.3.2.2 Monosyllabic - Nouns
tṇủḳ tṇủkvasingularplural

‘surface (of water)’

asematictṇủḳtṇủkki
sematictṇủkvatṇủkvit
inessivetṇủkvumittṇủkvusut
illativetṇủkvottṇủkvittit
elativetṇủkvunnittṇủkvungit
comitativetṇủkvugittnủkvuin
essivetṇủtstṇủttsot
§4.2.3.3 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -l

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -l have two sets of declension patterns. The first declension has -ḷḷỏ or -ḷḷeů in the sematic form, called the geminal -l declension, and the second has -ƛƛỏ or -ƛƛeů, called the complex -l declension. Both declensions have the back polarity series of case endings, but a front-rounded version exists with front-rounded nuclei. The illative plural has a short form in -ltit/-ltyt for geminal nouns.

Examples of monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -l include:

geminal -l

asematicsematic
loalloaḷḷỏ‘tail bone’
tṇỷltṇỷḷḷeů‘adult mite’
deildeiḷḷỏ‘roll, something rolled up’
kṇįuolkṇįuoḷḷỏ‘small hammer or club’

complex -l

asematicsematic
ṛuolṛuoƛƛỏ‘female stoat’
kįailkįaiƛƛeů‘compound leaf, fern’
sƛeilsƛeiƛƛỏ‘part of woven band that is tied to object’
boilboiƛƛỏ‘coagulated (blood)’
monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -l
singularplural
geminalcomplexdorsallabiodorsal
asematic-l-lki-ƛki
sematic-ḷḷỏ / -ḷḷeů-ƛƛỏ / -ƛƛeů-ḷḷit / -ḷḷyt-ƛƛit / -ƛƛyt
inessive-ḷḷummit / -ḷḷymmit-ƛƛummit / -ƛƛymmit-ḷḷusut / -ḷḷysyt-ƛƛusut / -ƛƛysyt
illative-ḷḷot / -ḷḷůt-ƛƛot / -ƛƛůt-ḷḷittit / -ḷḷyttyt
-ltit / -ltyt
-ƛƛittit / -ƛƛyttyt
elative-ḷḷunnit / -ḷḷynnit-ƛƛunnit / -ƛƛynnit-ḷḷungit / -ḷḷyngit-ƛƛungit / -ƛƛyngit
comitative-ḷḷukkit / -ḷḷykkit-ƛƛukkit / -ƛƛykkit-ḷḷuin / -ḷḷůin-ƛƛuin / -ƛƛůin
essive-ltsa-lttsot / -lttsůt
§4.2.3.3.1 Monosyllabic Geminal -l Nouns
loal loaḷḷỏsingularplural

‘tail bone’

asematicloalloalki
sematicloaḷḷỏloaḷḷit
inessiveloaḷḷummitloaḷḷusut
illativeloaḷḷotloaḷḷittit ~ loaltit
elativeloaḷḷunnitloaḷḷungit
comitativeloaḷḷukkitloaḷḷuin
essiveloaltsaloalttsot
tṇỷl tṇỷḷḷeůsingularplural

‘adult mite’

asematictṇỷltṇỷlki
sematictṇỷḷḷeůtṇỷḷḷyt
inessivetṇỷḷḷůmmittṇỷḷḷysyt
illativetṇỷḷḷůttṇỷḷḷyttyt ~ tṇỷltyt
elativetṇỷḷḷynnittṇỷḷḷyngit
comitativetṇỷḷḷykkittṇỷḷḷůin
essivetṇỷltsatṇỷlttsůt
§4.2.3.3.2 Monosyllabic Complex -l Nouns
ṛuol ṛuoƛƛỏsingularplural

‘female stoat’

asematicṛuolṛuoƛki
sematicṛuoƛƛỏṛuoƛƛit
inessiveṛuoƛƛummitṛuoƛƛusut
illativeṛuoƛƛotṛuoƛƛittit
elativeṛuoƛƛunnitṛuoƛƛungit
comitativeṛuoƛƛukkitṛuoƛƛuin
essiveṛuoltsaṛuolttsot
kįail kįaiƛƛeůsingularplural

‘compound leaf’

asematickįailkįaiƛki
sematickįaiƛƛeůkįaiƛƛit
inessivekįaiƛƛymmitkįaiƛƛysyt
illativekįaiƛƛůtkįaiƛƛittit
elativekįaiƛƛynnitkįaiƛƛyngit
comitativekįaiƛƛykkitkįaiƛƛůin
essivekįailtsakįailttsůt
§4.2.3.4 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -r

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -r have a single set of declension with a back polarity series of case endings and a front-rounded series for front-rounded nuclei. Monosyllabic nouns in -r form a very small group of nouns. The asematic ending -r becomes -ṛṛỏ or -ṛṛeů. The illative plural has a short form in -rtit/-rtyt.

Examples of monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -r include:

asematicsematic
hoarhoaṛṛỏ‘tail feathers’
tůartůaṛṛeů‘tuft of fur on ears’
gįuorgįuoṛṛỏ‘having ones ears laid back’
tṡảrtṡảṛṛeů‘something broken in its centre’
monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -r
singularplural
geminaldorsal
asematic-r-rki
sematic-ṛṛỏ / -ṛṛeů-ṛṛit / -ṛṛyt
inessive-ṛṛummit / -ṛṛymmit-ṛṛusut / -ṛṛysyt
illative-ṛṛot / -ṛṛůt-ṛṛittit / -ṛṛyttyt
-rtit / -rtyt
elative-ṛṛunnit / -ṛṛynnit-ṛṛungit / -ṛṛyngit
comitative-ṛṛukkit / -ṛṛykkit-ṛṛuin / -ṛṛůin
essive-rtsa-rttsot / -rttsůt
tůar tůaṛṛeůsingularplural

‘tuft of hair’

asematictůartůarki
sematictůaṛṛeůtůaṛṛit
inessivetůaṛṛymmittůaṛṛysyt
illativetůaṛṛůttůaṛṛyttyt ~ tůartyt
elativetůaṛṛynnittůaṛṛyngit
comitativetůaṛṛykkittůaṛṛůin
essivetůartsatůarttsůt
sṇįỉrsṇįỉṛṛỏsingularplural

‘spark, ember’

asematicsṇįỉrsṇįỉrki
sematicsṇįỉṛṛỏsṇįỉṛṛit
inessivesṇįỉṛṛummitsṇįỉṛṛusut
illativesṇįỉṛṛotsṇįỉṛṛittit ~ sṇįỉrtit
elativesṇįỉṛṛunnitsṇįỉṛṛungit
comitativesṇįỉṛṛukkitsṇįỉṛṛuin
essivesṇįỉrtsasṇįỉrttsot
§4.2.3.5 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -s

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -s have two sets of declension patterns. One pattern replaces the asematic -s with -hi (called the simple -s declension) in the sematic form, while the second pattern is more varied. The final -s is replaced by the ending of the form -s-C-a, where C can be -k-, -kv-, -ġ-, -ġv-, -s- or -ƛ-, and in a single word -ƛv-. This subdeclension is called the complex -s declension. and only contains a small number of words. All monosyllabic simple -s nouns have the front polarity series of case endings, while complex -s nouns have the back polarity series. The illative plural has a short form in -ttut/-ttyt for dorsal nouns.

simple -s

asematicsematic
tsủstsủhi‘middle of a canoe’
sġiassġiahi‘dried grass’
tṡvuostṡvuohi‘black and white (of coat)’

complex -s

asematicsematic
gįaisgįaiska‘wood warped by moisture’
ƛỉsƛỉskva‘path that goes under (tree, rock)’
oasoassa‘smell of rot’
teisteisġa‘newborn bird’
ṇįỏsṇįỏsġva‘heavy snowfall’
hủshủsƛa‘cold and humid air’
keůskeůska‘shrill or high pitched voice/sound’
monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -s
singularplural
geminalcomplexdorsallabiodorsal
asematic-s-ski
sematic-hi-s-C-a-hut-s-C-it
inessive-ṃṃut
-ṃṃyt
-s-C-umit-hisit-s-C-usut
illative-het-s-C-ot-huttut / -hyttyt
-ttut / -ttyt
-s-C-ittit
elative-hinnit-s-C-unnit-hingit-s-C-ungit
comitative-hikkut-s-C-on
-s-C-ugit
-hein-s-C-uin
essive-ttsa-ttset-ttsot

The essive singular and plural is geminated in monosyllabic -s nouns.

§4.2.3.5.1 Monosyllabic Simple -s Nouns
sġias sġiahisingularplural

‘dried grass’

asematicsġiassġiaski
sematicsġiahisġiahut
inessivesġiaṃṃutsġiahisit
illativesġiahetsġiahuttut ~ sġiattut
elativesġiahinnitsġiahingit
comitativesġiahikkutsġiahein
essivesġiattsasġiattset
bỏs bỏhisingularplural

‘large animal droppings’

asematicbỏsbỏski
sematicbỏhibỏhut
inessivebỏṃṃutbỏhisit
illativebỏhetbỏhuttut ~ bỏttut
elativebỏhinnitbỏhingit
comitativebỏhikkutbỏhein
essivebỏttsabỏttset
§4.2.3.5.2 Monosyllabic Complex -s Nouns
ṇįỏs ṇįỏsġvasingularplural

‘heavy snowfall’

asematicṇįỏsṇįỏski
sematicṇįỏsġvaṇįỏsġvit
inessiveṇįỏṃṃitṇįỏsġvusut
illativeṇįỏsġvotṇįỏsġvittit
elativeṇįỏsġvunnitṇįỏsġvungit
comitativeṇįỏsġvugitṇįỏsġvuin
essiveṇįỏttsa ṇįỏttsot
hủs hủsƛasingularplural

‘cold humid air’

asematichủshủski
sematichủsƛahủsƛit
inessivehủṃṃithủsƛusut
illativehủsƛothủsƛittit
elativehủsƛunnithủsƛungit
comitativehủsƛugithủsƛuin
essivehủttsa hủttsot
§4.2.3.6 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -ts

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -ts have a single set of declension pattern with a back polarity series, and a front-rounded series for front-rounded nuclei. There are only a handful of nouns in this declension. Their sematic form ends in -ḍḍa. The illative plural has a short form in -ttit/-ttyt.

Examples of monosyllabic simple -ts nouns:

asematicsematic
paitspaiḍḍa‘thin layer of ice’
goatsgoaḍḍa‘round decorative button’
heitsheiḍḍa‘root burl’
ḷỷtsḷỷḍḍa‘heavy sleet’
monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts
singularplural
asematic-ts-tski
sematic-ḍḍa-ḍḍit / -ḍḍyt
inessive-mmit-ḍḍusut / -ḍḍysyt
illative-ḍḍot / -ḍḍůt-ḍḍittit / -ḍḍyttyt
-ttit / -ttyt
elative-ḍḍunnit / -ḍḍynnit-ḍḍungit / -ḍḍyngit
comitative-hukkit / -hykkit-ḍḍuin / -ḍḍůin
essive-ttsa-ttsot / -ttsůt
heits heiḍḍasingularplural

‘root burl’

asematicheitsheitski
sematicheiḍḍaheiḍḍit
inessiveheimmitheiḍḍusut
illativeheiḍḍotheiḍḍittit ~ heittit
elativeheiḍḍunnitheiḍḍungit
comitativeheihukkitheiḍḍuin
essiveheittsaheittsot
ḷỷts ḷỷḍḍasingularplural

‘heavy sleet’

asematicḷỷtsḷỷtski
sematicḷỷḍḍaḷỷḍḍyt
inessiveḷỷmmitḷỷḍḍysyt
illativeḷỷḍḍůtḷỷḍḍyttyt ~ ḷỷttyt
elativeḷỷḍḍynnitḷỷḍḍyngit
comitativeḷỷhykkitḷỷḍḍůin
essiveḷỷttsaḷỷttsůt
§4.2.3.7 Monosyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -n

Monosyllabic consonant nouns ending in -n can decline according to one of three patterns, termed labial, dental and dorsal. All monosyllabic -n nouns have a contracted asematic form which unfolds in the sematic form to reveal a preglottalised cluster followed by -a.This declension has case endings in the back polarity series and in the front-rounded series for front-rounded nuclei.

asematicsematic
labial-n-bma
dental-n-dna
dorsal-n-kna

labial

asematicsematic
rỉnrỉbma‘limit, edge (of flat object)’
ƛỷnƛỷbma‘fat, well-fed child’
tṡỏntṡỏbma‘woven lid’

dental

asematicsematic
lỏnlỏdna‘calcaneus’
kįaunkįaudna‘oxide layer on metal, rust’
deůndeůdna‘male eider’

dorsal

asematicsematic
įeinįeikna‘needle house’
hỉnhỉkna‘very still weather’
vỏnvỏkna‘distant call/sound’

The declension of consonantal -n nouns can be abstracted for all three subclasses as shown below, where -ʔN- indicates a preglottalised nasal of labial (-bma, -dna or -kna respectively). The essive singular ends in -nttsa while the plural has -nttsot, though some speakers devoice the essive to -ntsa and -ntsot, usually doing the same for the asematic plural, having -nki instead of -nkki.

monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -n
singularplural
labialdentaldorsallabialdentaldorsal
asematic-n-nkki
sematic-bma-dna-kna-bmit
-bmyt
-dnit
-dnyt
-knit
-knyt
inessive-mmit-bmusut
-bmysyt
-dnusut
-dnysyt
-knusut
-knysyt
illative-bmot
-bmůt
-dnot
-dnůt
-knot
-knůt
-bmittit
-bmyttyt
-dnittit
-dnyttyt
-knittit
-knyttyt
elative-bmunnit
-bmynnit
-dnunnit
-dnynnit
-knunnit
-knynnit
-bmungit
-bmyngit
-dnungit
-dnyngit
-knungit
-knyngit
comitative-bmukkit
-bmykkit
-dnukkit
-dnykkit
-knukkit
-knykkit
-bmuin
-bmůin
-dnuin
-dnůin
-knuin
-knůin
essive-ntsa-nttsot
-nttsůt
§4.2.3.7.1 Monosyllabic Consonantal Labial -n Nouns
rỉn rỉbmasingularplural

‘limit’

asematicrỉnrỉnkki
sematicrỉbmarỉbmit
inessiverỉmmitrỉbmusut
illativerỉbmotrỉbmittit
elativerỉbmunnitrỉbmungit
comitativerỉbmukkitrỉbmuin
essiverỉntsarỉnttsot
ƛỷn ƛỷbmasingularplural

‘well-fed child’

asematicƛỷnƛỷnkki
sematicƛỷbmaƛỷbmyt
inessiveƛỷmmitƛỷbmysyt
illativeƛỷbmůtƛỷbmyttyt
elativeƛỷbmynnitƛỷbmyngit
comitativeƛỷbmykkitƛỷbmůin
essiverỉntsaƛỷnttsůt
§4.2.3.7.2 Monosyllabic Consonantal Dental -n Nouns
lỏn lỏdnasingularplural

‘calcaneus’

asematiclỏnlỏnkki
sematiclỏdnalỏdnit
inessivelỏmmitlỏdnusut
illativelỏdnotlỏdnittit
elativelỏdnunnitlỏdnungit
comitativelỏdnukkitlỏdnuin
essivelỏntsalỏnttsot
§4.2.3.7.3 Monosyllabic Consonantal Dorsal -n Nouns
hỉn hỉknasingularplural

‘very still weather’

asematichỉnhỉnkki
sematichỉknahỉknit
inessivehỉmmithỉknusut
illativehỉknothỉknittit
elativehỉknunnithỉknungut
comitativehỉknukkithỉknuin
essivehỉntsahỉnttsot

§4.2.4 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Declensions

Schizaphonic declensions are very similar to their consonantal counterparts but differ in two main ways – the sematic ends in -n, and the polarity series is dependent on the polarity of the nucleus, resulting in a sort of vowel harmony. For example, monosyllabic consonantal nouns in -r have a sematic form in -ṛṛỏ, but schizaphonic nouns in -r can have -ṛṛen, -ṛṛon or -ṛṛůn. Oblique cases other than the comitative singular do not differ other than through their polarity series. The comitative singular is usually -ikkut/-ukkit/-ykkit in schizaphonic nouns, with occasional devoicing of voiced geminate stops preceding the case ending, for example tsỉktsỉggentsỉkkikkut ‘splinter’ (not *tsỉggikkut). A few nouns have forms not found in monosyllabic non-schizaphonic declensions. The asematic plural of schizaphonic nouns is formed on the basis of the sematic form of the noun instead of the asematic as in monosyllabic consonantal nouns. For example, consonantal nouns in -r have a plural in -rki, but schizaphonic nouns in -r have a plural in -ṛṛegi, -ṛṛogi or -ṛṛůgi. Like all monosyllabic nouns, the asematic plural undergoes vowel fronting.

There is unfortunately no way to tell whether a monosyllabic noun ending in a consonant belongs to the consonantal declension group of the schizaphonic declension group, but fortunately both declension groups are rather small.

§4.2.4.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -t

Monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -t decline much like their consonantal counterparts but the comitative singular has forms in -tven/-tvon/-tvůn. There are only a few schizaphonic nouns in -t:

asematicsematic
bỷtbỷddůn‘new born’
paitpaiddůn‘idiot’
skviutskviudden‘gash’
sṃůatsṃůaddůn‘someone with short hair’
spaitspaiddůn‘rumen’
tsƛỉttsƛỉdden‘fish jowls’
tṡuittṡuiddon‘crayfish’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -t
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-t-ddegi-ddogi-ddůgi
sematic-dden-ddon-ddůn-ddut-ddit-ddyt
inessive-ddimmut
-ddimmyt
-ddummit-ddymmit-ddisit-ddusut-ddysyt
illative-ddet-ddot-ddůt-dduttut-ddittit-ddyttyt
elative-ddinnit-ddunnit-ddynnit-ddingit-ddungit-ddyngit
comitative-ddikkut-ddukkit-ddykkit-ddein-dduin-ddůin
essive-ts-ttset-ttsot-ttsůt
§4.2.4.1.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -t
skviut skviuddensingularplural

‘small cut’

asematicskviutskviuddogi
sematicskviuddenskviuddut
inessiveskviuddimmutskviuddisit
illativeskviuddetskviudduttut
elativeskviuddinnitskviuddingit
comitativeskviuddikkutskviuddein
essiveskviutsskviuttset
§4.2.4.1.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -t
tṡuit tṡuiddonsingularplural

‘crayfish’

asematictṡuittṡuiddogi
sematictṡuiddontṡuiddit
inessivetṡuiddummittṡuiddusut
illativetṡuiddottṡuiddittit
elativetṡuiddunnittṡuiddungit
comitativetṡuiddukkittṡuidduin
essivetṡuitstṡuittsot
§4.2.4.1.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -t
sṃůat sṃůaddůnsingularplural

‘someone with short hair’

asematicsṃůatsṃůaddůgi
sematicsṃůaddůnsṃůaddyt
inessivesṃůaddymmitsṃůaddysyt
illativesṃůaddůtsṃůaddyttyt
elativesṃůaddynnitsṃůaddyngit
comitativesṃůaddykkitsṃůaddůin
essivesṃůatssṃůattsůt
§4.2.4.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -k

Monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -k are few, and there is no schizaphonic noun in -. The comitative singular has the form -kven/-kvon/-kvůn. The illative plural has a short form in -ktut/-ktit/-ktyt.

asematicsematic
aikaiggůn‘phalange’
kvůekkvůeggůn‘aspen bud (fallen)’
ṃuokṃuoggon‘(older) man with a belly, rude older man’
ƛủkƛủggon‘stock dove’
ṇįeikṇįeiggennebria gyllenhali
skaykskayggůn‘canine tooth’
tsỉktsỉggen‘splinter (in skin)’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -k
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-k-ggegi-ggogi-ggůgi
sematic-ggen-ggon-ggůn-ggut-ggit-ggyt
inessive-ggimmut
-ggimmyt
-ggummit-ggymmit-ggisit-ggusut-ggysyt
illative-gget-ggot-ggůt-gguttut
-ktut
-ggittit
-ktit
-ggyttyt
-ktyt
elative-gginnit-ggunnit-ggynnit-ggingit-ggungit-ggyngit
comitative-ggikkut-ggukkit-ggykkit-ggein-gguin-ggůin
essive-ts-ttset-ttsot-ttsůt
§4.2.4.2.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -k
tsỉk tsỉggensingularplural

‘splinter (in skin)’

asematictsỉktsỉggegi
sematictsỉggentsỉggut
inessivetsỉggimmyttsỉggisit
illativetsỉggettsỉgguttut ~ tsỉktut
elativetsỉgginnittsỉggingit
comitativetsỉggikkuttsỉggein
essivetsỉtstsỉttset
§4.2.4.2.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -k
ƛủk ƛủggonsingularplural

‘stock dove’

asematicƛủkƛủggogi
sematicƛủggonƛủggit
inessiveƛủggummitƛủggusut
illativeƛủggotƛủggittit ~ ƛủktit
elativeƛủggunnitƛủggungit
comitativeƛủggukkitƛủgguin
essiveƛủtsƛủttsot
§4.2.4.2.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -k
skayk skayggůnsingularplural

‘canine tooth’

asematicskaykskayggůgi
sematicskayggůnskayggyt
inessiveskayggymmitskayggẙsyt
illativeskayggůtskayggyttyt ~ skayktyt
elativeskayggynnitskayggyngit
comitativeskayggykkitskayggůin
essiveskaytsskayttsůt
§4.2.4.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -l

All monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -l have a sematic form in -ƛƛen/-ƛƛon/-/ƛƛůn, there is no corresponding simple -l declension for schizaphonic nouns. The comitative singular has the form -ƛven/-ƛvon/-ƛvůn. Two nouns have an irregular declension: tsỉl ‘ant’ has the sematic form tsỉƛken and in the oblique cases declines line a schizaphonic -k noun (tsỉƛken, tsỉƛkimmyt, tsỉƛket, tsỉƛkinnit, tsỉƛkikkut) but has the essive singular form tsỉltsa and the essive plural form tsỉlttset, and skuol ‘perch’ has the sematic form skuoldon and declines like an schizaphonic -t noun (skuoldon, skuoldummut, skuoldot, skuoldunnit, skuoldukkit) but has the essive singular forms skuoltsa and the essive plural form skuolttsot.

asematicsematic
ỉlỉƛƛen‘bush, shrub’
skeilskeiƛƛen‘ladle’
tsġuoltsġuoƛƛon‘(wood) chip’
randaġ-ġỷlrandaġ-ġỷƛƛůn‘curved tree that supports the roof of a hulġġu hut’
pỉlpỉƛƛen‘perpendicular logs that support fire’
ṡủlṡủƛƛon‘a lot of ash, pile of ash’
tṇįeůltṇįeůƛƛůn‘horizontal branch supported at both end to hang and dry’
bůilbůiƛƛůn‘leash’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -l
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-l-ƛƛegi-ƛƛogi-ƛƛůgi
sematic-ƛƛen-ƛƛon-ƛƛůn-ƛƛut-ƛƛit-ƛƛyt
inessive-ƛƛimmut
-ƛƛimmyt
-ƛƛummit-ƛƛymmit-ƛƛisit-ƛƛusut-ƛƛysyt
illative-ƛƛet-ƛƛot-ƛƛůt-ƛƛuttut-ƛƛittit-ƛƛyttyt
elative-ƛƛinnit-ƛƛunnit-ƛƛynnit-ƛƛingit-ƛƛungit-ƛƛyngit
comitative-ƛƛikkut-ƛƛukkit-ƛƛykkit-ƛƛein-ƛƛuin-ƛƛůin
essive-ltsa-lttset-lttsot-lttsůt
§4.2.4.3.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -l
skeil skeiƛƛensingularplural

‘ladle’

asematicskeilskeiƛƛegi
sematicskeiƛƛenskeiƛƛut
inessiveskeiƛƛimmytskeiƛƛisit
illativeskeiƛƛetskeiƛƛuttut
elativeskeiƛƛinnitskeiƛƛingit
comitativeskeiƛƛikkutskeiƛƛein
essiveskeiltsaskeilttset
§4.2.4.3.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -l
tsġuol tsġuoƛƛonsingularplural

‘(wood) chip’

asematictsġuoltsġůeƛƛůgi
sematictsġuoƛƛontsġuoƛƛit
inessivetsġuoƛƛummittsġuoƛƛusut
illativetsġuoƛƛottsġuoƛƛittit
elativetsġuoƛƛunnittsġuoƛƛungit
comitativetsġuoƛƛukkittsġuoƛƛuin
essivetsġuoltsatsġuolttsot
§4.2.4.3.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -l
bůil bůiƛƛůnsingularplural

‘leash’

asematicbůilbůiƛƛůgi
sematicbůiƛƛůnbůiƛƛyt
inessivebůiƛƛymmitbůiƛƛysyt
illativebůiƛƛůtbůiƛƛyttyt
elativebůiƛƛynnitbůiƛƛyngit
comitativebůiƛƛykkitbůiƛƛůin
essivebůiltsabůilttsůt
§4.2.4.4 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -r

Monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -r have a sematic form in -ṛṛen/-ṛṛon/-ṛṛůn. There are only four such nouns. The asematic plural -ṛṛogi is not found as kaur is fronted to kayṛṛůgi. The illative plural has short forms in -rtut/-rtit/-rtyt.

asematicsematic
ỉrỉṛṛen‘arrow’
dvảrdvảṛṛůn‘knee cap’
tṇỷrtṇỷṛṛůn‘axe sheath’
kaurkauṛṛon‘amniotic sac’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -r
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-r-ṛṛegiØ-ṛṛůgi
sematic-ṛṛen-ṛṛon-ṛṛůn-ṛṛut-ṛṛit-ṛṛyt
inessive-ṛṛimmut
-ṛṛimmyt
-ṛṛummit-ṛṛymmit-ṛṛisit-ṛṛusut-ṛṛysyt
illative-ṛṛet-ṛṛot-ṛṛůt-ṛṛuttut
-rtut
-ṛṛittit
-rtit
-ṛṛyttyt
-rtyt
elative-ṛṛinnit-ṛṛunnit-ṛṛynnit-ṛṛingit-ṛṛungit-ṛṛyngit
comitative-ṛṛikkut-ṛṛukkit-ṛṛykkit-ṛṛein-ṛṛuin-ṛṛůin
essive-rtsa-rttset-rttsot-rttsůt
§4.2.4.4.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -r
ỉr ỉṛṛensingularplural

‘arrow’

asematicỉrỉṛṛegi
sematicỉṛṛenỉṛṛut
inessiveỉṛṛimmytỉṛṛisit
illativeỉṛṛetỉṛṛuttut ~ ỉrtut
elativeỉṛṛinnitỉṛṛingit
comitativeỉṛṛikkutỉṛṛein
essiveỉrtsaỉrttset
§4.2.4.4.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -r
kaur kauṛṛonsingularplural

‘amniotic sac’

asematickaurkayṛṛůgi
sematickauṛṛonkauṛṛit
inessivekauṛṛummitkauṛṛusut
illativekauṛṛotkauṛṛittit ~ kaurtit
elativekauṛṛunnitkauṛṛungit
comitativekauṛṛukkitkauṛṛuin
essivekaurtsakaurttsot
§4.2.4.4.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -r
tṇỷr tṇỷṛṛůnsingularplural

‘axe sheath’

asematictṇỷrtṇỷṛṛůgi
sematictṇỷṛṛůntṇỷṛṛyt
inessivetṇỷṛṛymmittṇỷṛṛysyt
illativetṇỷṛṛůttṇỷṛṛyttyt ~ tṇỷrtyt
elativetṇỷṛṛynnittṇỷṛṛyngit
comitativetṇỷṛṛykkittṇỷṛṛůin
essivetṇỷrtsatṇỷrttsůt
§4.2.4.5 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -s

Monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -s have only a single declension pattern found in three polarity series. Such nouns have a sematic form in -ssen/-sson/-ssůn. The essive singular is -ttsa but some speakers have -stsa, and the plural likewise is -ttset/-ttsot/-ttsůt but some use -stset/-stsot/-stsůt. The illative plural has short forms in -stut/-stit/-styt.

asematicsematic
kủskủsson‘talon, claw (bird)’
ṇįaisṇįaissůn‘emaciated animal’
ḷỉsḷỉssen‘pushy or bossy woman’
ṃủsṃủsson‘puppy (childish, otherwise ṃủsa)’
pỷspỷssůn‘dunlin (Calidris alpina)’
kỉskỉssen‘newbie, beginner’
reůsreůssůn‘poorly done work’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -s
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-s-ssegi-ssogi-ssůgi
sematic-ssen-sson-ssůn-ssut-ssit-ssyt
inessive-ssimmut
-ssimmyt
-ssummit-ssymmit-ssisit-ssusut-ssysyt
illative-sset-ssot-ssůt-ssuttut
-stut
-ssittit
-stit
-ssyttyt
-styt
elative-ssinnit-ssunnit-ssynnit-ssingit-ssungit-ssyngit
comitative-ssikkut-ssukkit-ssykkit-ssein-ssuin-ssůin
essive -ttsa-ttset-ttsot-ttsůt
§4.2.4.5.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -s
kỉs kỉssensingularplural

‘newbie’

asematickỉskỉssegi
sematickỉssenkỉssut
inessivekỉssimmytkỉssisit
illativekỉssetkỉssuttut ~ kỉstut
elativekỉssinnitkỉssingit
comitativekỉssikkutkỉssein
essivekỉttsakỉttset
§4.2.4.5.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -s
vỏs vỏssonsingularplural

‘ghost’

asematicvỏsvỏssogi
sematicvỏssonvỏssit
inessivevỏssummitvỏssusut
illativevỏssotvỏssittit ~ vỏstit
elativevỏssunnitvỏssungit
comitativevỏssukkitvỏssuin
essivevỏttsavỏttsot
§4.2.4.5.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -s
pỷs pỷssůnsingularplural

‘dunlin’

asematicpỷspỷssůgi
sematicpỷssůnpỷssyt
inessivepỷssymmitpỷssysyt
illativepỷssůtpỷssyttyt ~ pỷstyt
elativepỷssynnitpỷssyngit
comitativepỷssykkitpỷssůin
essivepỷttsapỷttsůt
§4.2.4.6 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Nouns in -n

Monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -n have a sematic form in -ngen/-ngon/-ngůn.

asematicsematic
sƛỉnsƛỉngen‘(rock) lichen’
ṛaunṛaungon‘dead, bleached standing tree’
ủnủngon‘(small) geothermal creek’
tsġỉntsġỉngen‘thin stip of wood/bark’
tsġvůentsġvůengůn‘atlantic wolffish’
baynbayngůn‘pumice (stone)’
ġvuonġvuongon‘sudden gust of wind’
ƛẻnƛẻngen‘cuff’
monosyllabic schizaphonic nouns in -n
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-n-ngegi-ngogi-ngůgi
sematic-ngen-ngon-ngůn-ngut-ngit-ngyt
inessive-ngimmut
-ngimmyt
-ngummit-ngymmit-ngisit-ngusut-ngysyt
illative-nget-ngot-ngůt-nguttut-ngittit-ngyttyt
elative-nginnit-ngunnit-ngynnit-ngingit-ngungit-ngyngit
comitative-ngikkut-ngukkit-ngykkit-ngein-nguin-ngůin
essive -ntsa-nttset-nttsot-nttsůt
§4.2.4.6.1 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front Polarity Nouns in -n
sƛỉn sƛỉngensingularplural

‘(rock) lichen’

asematicsƛỉnsƛỉngegi
sematicsƛỉngensƛỉngut
inessivesƛỉngimmytsƛỉngisit
illativesƛỉngetsƛỉnguttut
elativesƛỉnginnitsƛỉngingit
comitativesƛỉngikkutsƛỉngein
essivesƛỉntsasƛỉnttset
§4.2.4.6.2 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Back Polarity Nouns in -n
ṛaun ṛaungonsingularplural

‘dead, bleached standing tree’

asematicṛaunṛaungogi
sematicṛaungonṛaungit
inessiveṛaungummitṛaungusut
illativeṛaungotṛaungittit
elativeṛaungunnitṛaungungit
comitativeṛaungukkitṛaunguin
essiveṛauntsaṛaunttsot
§4.2.4.6.3 Monosyllabic Schizaphonic Front-Rounded Polarity Nouns in -n
tsġvůen tsġvůengůnsingularplural

‘atlantic wolffish’

asematictsġvůentsġvůengůgi
sematictsġvůengůntsġvůengyt
inessivetsġvůengymmittsġvůengysyt
illativetsġvůengůttsġvůengyttyt
elativetsġvůengynnittsġvůengyngit
comitativetsġvůengykkittsġvůengůin
essivetsġvůentsatsġvůenttsůt

§4.3 Bisyllabic Words

Bisyllabic nouns represent the majority of all Pine nouns. They undergo two significant phonological changes, consonant diaphony (changes in the grade or quality of the coda) and rhizal aphony (changes in the polarity, length or both in the nucleus), when declined. Only some consonantal bisyllabic nouns undergo diaphony (-n and -s bisyllabic consonantal nouns). Knowing how to apply these changes and when represents the bulk of the effort it takes to decline bisyllabic words in Pine.

§4.3.1 Archeaphonic & Enteraphonic Bisyllabic Words

Archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic nouns are nouns which end in a tense vowel (-i, -u, -a, -y). Nouns in -a and -u are declined alike. Archeaphonic nouns begin with a consonant, and enteraphonic nouns begin with a vowel (or į-). They differ from consonantal and teleutophonic nouns in that their declension is determined by the relationship between its stressed syllable (onset and coda for archeaphonic nouns, and nucleus in enteraphonic nouns) and the word-final vowel.

Fortunately, non-consonantal bisyllabic noun declensions are quite simple. All such nouns undergo consonant diaphony (if possible) in their sematic form. Rhizal apophony is more complex however as can lead to either fronting or backing of the nucleus. There are two important terms to understand when dealing with rhizal apophony. Propolar apophony is apophony that agrees with the polarity of the nucleus: a front vowel becomes fronted, and a back vowel becomes backed. Contrapolar apophony is the opposite, a front vowel becomes backed, and a back vowel becomes fronted. The following applies to non-consonantal bisyllabic nouns.

Propolar apophony is always applied in antiphonic nouns, whether homorganic, heterorganic or enteraphonic. All nouns gain a paromophonic vowel endings in the sematic, but homorganic nouns have -en/-on/-ůn, heterorganic nouns have -e/-o/-ů and enteraphonic have -en/-on/-ůn. All nouns with a front-rounded vowel are always propolar, and wherever one might expect a back ending in either -o- or -u-, nouns with front-rounded vowels will instead have -ů- or -y-, for example lįehhu ‘tea’, which is a heterorganic antiphonic with a front vowel has the sematic form lįeyḍḍů instead of the expected *lįeyḍḍo (-a ⟫ -o ⟫⟫ -ů). This can lead to mixed alignment in the plural, for example nįobba ‘beard’ has front-aligning endings in the plural oblique cases (excluding the essive), but the expected -uttut becomes -yttyt, the only front-rounded ending of the plural declension, due to the fact that the sematic form of nįobba is nįůapi. This type of mixed alignment occurs in symphonic nouns with a back alignment. Homorganic, heterorganic and enteraphonic symphonic nouns undergo contrapolar apophony (unless they have a front-rounded nucleus). Homorganic and enteraphonic nouns gain an parantiophonic vowel ending – homorganic symphonic nouns end in -en/-on/-ůn, enteraphonic nouns end in -en/-on/-ůn. Heterorganic symphonic nouns gain an enantiophonic vowel and end in -i/-u/-y. In other words, symphonic sematic endings are parantiophonic if the vowel is not in word-final position, but enantiophonic if in word-final position, and all antiphonic nouns have a paromophonic vowel ending, regardless of word-final position.

A way to remember this is that if a word is symphonic, it will be contrapolar in the sematic (same becomes different), while if a word is antiphonic, it is propolar (different stays different), except if it has a front-rounded vowel in its nucleus. The table below summarises vowel diaphony of bisyllabic nouns.

archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic noun declension patterns
polarity of nucleussymphonicantiphonic
homorganicfrontcontrapolar apophonyback-Ø-onpropolar apophonyfront-Ø-on
keggikeukvon
‘day’
tselgatseilkkon
‘young woman’
backfront-Ø-enback-Ø-en
ƛarkaƛảrgen
‘seashore’
salgisoalkken
‘door’
front-roundedpropolar apophonyfront-Ø-ůnfront-Ø-ůn
ƛyṇṇiƛỷtṇůn
‘candle’
tylpṃatỷƛṃůn
‘squirrel’s nest’
heterorganicfrontcontrapolar apophonyback-Ø-ufront-Ø-o
dimmidỉmu
‘older brother’
hįiƛƛahįỉƛo
‘memory’
backfront-Ø-iback-Ø-e
galbagảlppi
‘ground, land’
bakviboagve
‘house’
front-roundedpropolar apophonyfront-Ø-yfront-Ø-ů
ġylkiġỷƛky
‘(small) mountain’
tyġġatỷġů
‘ban’
enteraphonicfrontcontrapolar apophonyback-Ø-onfront-Ø-on
eḍkieutskon
‘spear’
ilbiỉlppon
‘flower’
backfront-Ø-enback-Ø-en
atṇaảṇṇen
‘hand’
aittṡioitṡen
‘creature’
front-roundedpropolar apophonyfront-Ø-ůnfront-Ø-ůn
ůttṡyeůtṡůn
‘fish skin’
yrġġaỷrġůn
‘bud’

The declension of archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic nouns in oblique cases is very similar to that of monosyllabic nouns, and exists in three polarity series. The asematic plural is -gi, which causes relaxation of the word-final vowel (-i ⟫-egi, -u ⟫ -ogi, -a ⟫ -ogi, -y ⟫ -ůgi). The essive singular and plural causes gemination of the final vowel. The comitative singular has a -v- which can assimilate to the previous consonant causing gemination if possible. If gemination is not possible, it appears, but some clusters cause deletion. This comitative -v- behaves exactly like the -v- versioner of verbs and follows the same rules. The sematic plural always has the opposite polarity of the final vowel in the asematic case for front and back nouns, meaning nouns ending in -i in the asematic will always have -ut, and nouns in -u or -a will always have a sematic plural in -it. Antiphonic nouns have a polarity series that agree with the polarity of the asematic form, while symphonic nouns have an inverse polarity series to their asematic final vowel. For symphonic nouns, the illative plural also agrees with the polarity of the asematic final vowel, but in antiphonic nouns, the illative plura has opposite polarity. This results in symphonic nouns having a sematic and illative plural of opposite alignment for front and back aligning nouns, and antiphonic nouns having a sematic and illative plural of the same alignment for front and back aligning nouns.

archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic oblique case endings: symphonic
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-i-u, -a-y-egi-ogi-ůgi
sematic-u/-o/-on-i/-e/-en-y/-ů-/-ůn-ut
-yt
-it-yt
inessive-umit
-ummit
-mmit
-imut/-imyt
-immut/-immyt
-mmut/-mmyt
-ymit
-ymmit
-mmit
-usut
-ysyt
-isit-ysyt
illative-ot-et-ůt-ittit-uttut-yttyt
elative-unnit-innit-ynnit-ungit
-yngit
-ingit-yngit
comitative-ugit
-ukkit
-igut
-ikkut
-ikkyt
-ygit
-ykkit
-uin
-ůin
-ein-ůin
essive -ỉts-ủts, -ảts, -oats-ỷts-ỉttset-ủttsot, -ảttset, -oattsot-ỷttsůt
archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic oblique case endings: antiphonic
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-i-u, -a-y-egi-ogi-ůgi
sematic-i/-e/-en-u/-o/-on-y/-ů-/-ůn-ut
-yt
-it-yt
inessive-imut/-imyt
-immut/-immyt
-mmut/-mmyt
-umit
-ummit
-mmit
-ymit
-ymmit
-mmit
-isit-usut/-ysyt-ysyt
illative-et-ot-ůt-uttut
-yttyt
-ittit-yttyt
elative-innit-unnit-ynnit-ingit-ungit/-yngit-yngit
comitative-igut
-ikkut
-ikkyt
-ugit
-ukkit
-ygit
-ykkit
-ein-uin/-ůin-ůin
essive -ỉts-ủts, -ảts, -oats-ỷts-ỉttset-ủttsot, -ảttset, -oattsot-ỷttsůt
§4.3.1.1 Homorganic Symphonic Nouns

Homorganic symphonic nouns are those whose onset and coda have the same place of articulation, and whose nucleus and final vowel have the same polarity. They undergo contrapolar apophony and have a sematic form in -n. Below are examples of homorganic symphonic noun declensions.

goka gvůakkensingularplural

‘sheath, foreskin’

asematicgokagokogi
sematicgvůakkengvůakkit
inessivegvůakkimmytgvůakkisit
illativegvůakketgvůakkyttyt
elativegvůakkinnitgvůakkingit
comitativegvůakkikkytgvůakkein
essivegokoatsgokoattsot
ḷyḷy ḷỷḷḷůnsingularplural

‘newborn child’

asematicḷyḷyḷyḷůgi
sematicḷỷḷḷůnḷỷḷḷyt
inessiveḷỷḷḷymmitḷỷḷḷysyt
illativeḷỷḷḷůtḷỷḷḷyttyt
elativeḷỷḷḷynnitḷỷḷḷyngit
comitativeḷỷḷḷykkitḷỷḷḷůin
essiveḷyḷỷtsḷỷḷỷttsůt
veivi vỉvvonsingularplural

‘small bird, tit (Paridae)

asematicveiviveivegi
sematicvỉvvonvỉvvut
inessivevỉvvummitvỉvvusut
illativevỉvvotvỉvvittit
elativevỉvvunnitvỉvvungit
comitativevỉvvukkitvỉvvuin
essiveveivỉtsveivỉttset
mavvu mảvensingularplural

‘meat’

asematicmavvumavvogi
sematicmảvenmảvit
inessivemảvimmytmảvisit
illativemảvetmảvyttyt
elativemảvinnitmảvingit
comitativemảvikkytmavvein
essivemavvủtsmavvỉttset
sṇeƛƛi sṇeuƛonsingularplural

‘butterfly’

asematicsṇeƛƛisṇeƛƛegi
sematicsṇeuƛonsṇeuƛut
inessivesṇeuƛummitsṇeuƛusut
illativesṇeuƛotsṇeuƛittit
elativesṇeuƛunnitsṇeuƛungit
comitativesṇeuƛukkitsṇeuƛuin
essivesṇeƛƛỉtssṇeƛƛỉttset
noaltta nảltensingularplural

‘tooth’

asematicnoalttanoalttogi
sematicnảltennảltit
inessivenảltimmytnảltisit
illativenảltetnảltyttyt
elativenảltinnitnảltingit
comitativenảltikkytnảltein
essivenoalttoatsnoalttoattsot
keggi keukvonsingularplural

‘day’

asematickeggikeggegi
sematickeukvonkeukvut
inessivekeukvummitkeukvuttut
illativekeukvotkeukvittit
elativekeukvunnitkeukvungit
comitativekeukvukkitkeukvuin
essivekeggỉtskeggỉttset
tasku tảktsensingularplural

‘woods, small forest’

asematictaskutaskogi
sematictảktsentảktsit
inessivetảktsimmyttảktsisit
illativetảktsettảktsyttyt
elativetảktsinnittảktsingit
comitativetảktsikkyttảktsein
essivetaskủtstaskủttsot
gakna gảngensingularplural

‘net, mesh’

asematicgaknagaknogi
sematicgảngengảngit
inessivegảngimmytgảngisit
illativegảngetgảngyttyt
elativegảnginnitgảngingit
comitativegảngikkytgảngein
essivegaknảtsgaknảttset
tsarppa tsảrpensingularplural

button’

asematictsarppatsarppogi
sematictsảrpentsảrpit
inessivetsảrpimmyttsảrpisit
illativetsảrpettsảrpyttyt
elativetsảrpinnittsảrpingit
comitativetsảrpikkyttsảrpein
essivetsarppảtstsarppảttset
§4.3.1.2 Homorganic Antiphonic Nouns

Homorganic antiphonic nouns are those whose onset and coda have the same place of articulation, and whose nucleus and final vowel have the opposite polarity. Like all antiphonic nouns, they undergo propolar apophony, and because they are homorganic, they have a sematic form in -n. Below are examples of homorganic symphonic noun declensions.

soaƛƛi sauƛensingularplural

‘fish’

asematicsoaƛƛisoaƛƛegi
sematicsauƛensauƛut
inessivesauƛimmutsauƛisit
illativesauƛetsauƛuttut
elativesauƛinnitsauƛingit
comitativesauƛikkutsauƛein
essivesoaƛƛỉtssoaƛƛỉttset
koiġġu kảġensingularplural

‘ravine, gap’

asematickoiġġukoiġġogi
sematickảġenkảġyt
inessivekảġimmytkảġisit
illativekảġetkảġyttyt
elativekảġinnitkảġingit
comitativekảġikkytkảġein
essivekoiġġủtskoiġġủttsot
ƛoari ⟫ ƛvaurrensingularplural

‘edge of cliff’

asematicƛoariƛoaregi
sematicƛvaurrenƛvaurrut
inessiveƛvaurrimmutƛvaurrisit
illativeƛvaurretƛvaurruttut
elativeƛvaurrinnitƛvaurringit
comitativeƛvaurrikkutƛvaurrein
essiveƛoarỉtsƛoarỉttset
risu ⟫ rỉssonsingularplural

‘sandy ground’

asematicrisurisogi
sematicrỉssonrỉssit
inessiverỉssummitrỉssusut
illativerỉssotrỉssittit
elativerỉssunnitrỉssungit
comitativerỉssukkitrỉssuin
essiverisủtsrisủttsot
voammi vaumensingularplural

‘ghost’

asematicvoammivoammegi
sematicvaumenvaumut
inessivevaumimmutvaumisit
illativevaumetvaumuttut
elativevauminnutvaumingit
comitativevaumikkutvaumein
essivevoammỉtsvoammỉttset
lillu lỉlonsingularplural

‘maternal uncle’

asematiclillulillogi
sematiclỉlonlỉlit
inessivelỉlummitlỉlusut
illativelỉlotlỉlittit
elativelỉlunnitlỉlungit
comitativelỉlukkitlỉluin
essivelillủtslillủttsot
tsottsi tsỏtsensingularplural

‘spark’

asematictsottsitsottsegi
sematictsỏtsentsỏtsut
inessivetsỏtsimmuttsỏtsisit
illativetsỏtsettsỏtsuttut
elativetsỏtsinnittsỏtsingit
comitativetsỏtsikkuttsỏtsein
essivetsottsỉtstsottsỉttset
půbma peůmůnsingularplural

‘point, spot, place’

asematicpůbmapůbmůgi
sematicpeůmůnpeůmyt
inessivepeůmymmitpeůmysyt
illativepeůmůtpeůmyttyt
elativepeůmynnitpeůmyngit
comitativepeůmykkitpeůmůin
essivepůbmảtspůbmảttsůt
nįeltṡa nįeilttṡonsingularplural

‘chief’

asematicnįeltṡanįeltṡogi
sematicnįeilttṡonnįeilttṡit
inessivenįeilttṡummitnįeilttṡusut
illativenįeilttṡotnįeilttṡittit
elativenįeilttṡunnitnįeilttṡungit
comitativenįeilttṡukkitnįeilttṡuin
essivenįeltṡảtsnįeltṡảttset
ṡeṡkvu ṡeiktṡonsingularplural

‘slosh, wet snow’

asematicṡeṡkvuṡeṡkvogi
sematicṡeiktṡonṡeiktṡit
inessiveṡeiktṡummitṡeiktṡusut
illativeṡeiktṡotṡeiktṡittit
elativeṡeiktṡunnitṡeiktṡungit
comitativeseiktṡukkitṡeiktṡuin
essiveṡeṡkvủtsṡeṡkvủttsot
sasƛi soatsƛensingularplural

‘responsability’

asematicsasƛisasƛegi
sematicsoatsƛensoatsƛut
inessivesoatsƛimmutsoatsƛisit
illativesoatsƛetsoatsƛuttut
elativesoatsƛinnitsoatsƛingit
comitativesoatsƛikkutsoatsƛein
essivesasƛỉtssasƛỉttset
sisku sỉktsonplural

‘thunder’

asematicsiskusiskogi
sematicsỉktsonsỉktsit
inessivesỉktsummitsỉktsusut
illativesỉktsotsỉktsittit
elativesỉktsunnitsỉktsungit
comitativesỉktsukkitsỉktsuin
essivesiskủtssiskủttsot
§4.3.1.3 Heterorganic Symphonic Nouns

Heterorganic symphonic nouns are those whose onset and coda have a different place of articulation, but whose nucleus and final vowel have the same polarity. Heteorganic symphonic nouns undergo contrapolar diaphony (except front-rounded nuclei, which always undergo propolar apophony), and their sematic forms end in a tense vowel.

pįana pįảḥḥisingularplural

‘doctor’

asematicpįaḥapįaḥogi
sematicpįảḥḥipįảḥḥit
inessivepįảḥḥimytpįảḥḥisit
illativepįảḥḥetpįảḥḥyttyt
elativepįảḥḥinnitpįảḥḥingit
comitativepįảḥḥigytpįảḥḥein
essivepįaḥảtspįaḥảttset
hiri hỉrrusingularplural

‘single hair’

asematichirihiregi
sematichỉrruhỉrrut
inessivehỉrrumithỉrrusut
illativehỉrrothỉrrittit
elativehỉrrunnithỉrrungit
comitativehỉrrugithỉrruin
essivehirỉtshirỉttset
kvoḷḷu kvůaƛƛisingularplural

‘cloud’

asematickvoḷḷukvoḷḷogi
sematickvůaƛƛikvůaƛƛit
inessivekvůaƛƛimytkvůaƛƛisit
illativekvůaƛƛetkvůaƛƛyttyt
elativekvůaƛƛinnitkvůaƛƛingit
comitativekvůaƛƛigytkvůaƛƛein
essivekvoḷḷủtskvoḷḷủttsot
nįobba nįůpisingularplural

‘beard’

asematicnįobbanįobbogi
sematicnįůpinįůpit
inessivenįůpimytnįůpisit
illativenįůpetnįůpyttyt
elativenįůpinnitnįůpingit
comitativenįůpigytnįůpein
essivenįobboatsnįobboattsot
sevvi seuvusingularplural

‘river’

asematicsevvisevvegi
sematicseuvuseuvut
inessiveseuvumitseuvusut
illativeseuvotseuvittit
elativeseuvunnitseuvungit
comitativeseuvugitsevvuin
essivesevvỉtssevvỉttset
tsġeġġi tsġeutġu singularplural

‘sledgehammer’

asematictsġeġġitsġeġġegi
sematictsġeutġutsġeutġut
inessivetsġeutġumittsġeutġusut
illativetsġeutġottsġeutġittit
elativetsġeutġunnittsġeutġungit
comitativetsġeutġugittsġeutġuin
essivetsġeġġỉtstsġeġġỉttset
sodna sůnisingularplural

‘shade, shadow’

asematicsodnasodnogi
sematicsůnisůnit
inessivesůnimytsůnisit
illativesůnetsůnyttyt
elativesůninnitsůningit
comitativesůnigytsůnein
essivesodnoatssodnoattsot
sukƛu seyġƛi singularplural

‘whale’

asematicsukƛusukƛogi
sematicseyġƛiseyġƛit
inessiveseyġƛimytseyġƛisit
illativeseyġƛetseyġƛyttyt
elativeseyġƛinnitseyġƛingit
comitativeseyġƛigytseyġƛein
essivesukƛủtssukƛủttsot
piṡvi pỉtṡvusingularplural

‘lynx’

asematicpiṡvipiṡvegi
sematicpỉtṡvupỉtṡvut
inessivepỉtṡvumitpỉtṡvusut
illativepỉtṡvotpỉtṡvittit
elativepỉtṡvunnitpỉtṡvungit
comitativepỉtṡvugitpỉtṡvuin
essivepiṡvỉtspiṡvỉttset
skaiįi skoiįįusingularplural

‘clear water river’

asematicskaiįiskaiįegi
sematicskoiįįuskoiįįut
inessiveskoiįįumitskoiįįusut
illativeskoiįįotskoiįįittit
elativeskoiįįunnitskoiįįungit
comitativeskoiįįugitskoiįįuin
essiveskaiįỉtsskaiįỉttset
maihhi moihusingularplural

‘maple’

asematicmaihhimaihhegi
sematicmoihumoihut
inessivemoihumitmoihusut
illativemoihotmoihittit
elativemoihunnitmoihungit
comitativemoihugitmoihuin
essivemaihhỉtsmaihhỉttset
§4.3.1.4 Heterorganic Antiphonic Nouns

Heterorganic antiphonic nouns are those whose onset and coda have a different place of articulation, and whose nucleus and final vowel have the opposite polarity. Heteorganic antiphonic nouns undergo propolar diaphony, and their sematic forms end in a lax vowel.

tingu ⟫ tỉknosingularplural

‘power, energy’

asematictingutingogi
sematictỉknotỉknit
inessivetỉknumittỉknusut
illativetỉknottỉknittit
elativetỉknunnittỉknungit
comitativetỉknugittỉknuin
essivetingủtstingủttsot
taikƛa tảġƛůsingularplural

‘snail’

asematictaikƛataikƛůgi
sematictảġƛůtảġƛit
inessivetảġƛymittảġƛysyt
illativetảġƛůttảġƛyttyt
elativetảġƛynnittảġƛyngit
comitativetảgƛygittảġƛůin
essivetaikƛảtstaikƛảttset
tabbi toapesingularplural

‘kidney’

asematictabbitabbegi
sematictoapetoaput
inessivetoapimuttoapisit
illativetoapettoaputtut
elativetoapinnittoapingit
comitativetoapiguttoapein
essivetabbỉtstabbỉttset
kigga kỉkosingularplural

‘forest’

asematickiggakiggogi
sematickỉkokỉkit
inessivekỉkumitkỉkusut
illativekỉkotkỉkittit
elativekỉkunnitkỉkungit
comitativekỉkugitkỉkuin
essivekiggảtskiggảttset
tůƛƛa teůƛůsingularplural

‘large pine’

asematictůƛƛatůƛƛůgi
sematicteůƛůteůƛyt
inessiveteůƛymitteůƛysyt
illativeteůƛůtteůƛyttyt
elativeteůƛynnitteůƛyngit
comitativeteůƛygit teůƛůin
essivetůƛƛảtstůƛƛảttsůt
tṡilla tṡỉlosingularplural

‘island’

asematictṡillatṡillogi
sematictṡỉlotṡỉlit
inessivetṡỉlumittṡỉlusut
illativetṡỉlottṡỉlittit
elativetṡỉlunnittṡỉlungit
comitativetṡỉlugittṡỉluin
essivetṡillảtstṡillảttset
ṃįaski ṃįoaktsesingularplural

‘bear’

asematicṃįaskiṃįaskegi
sematicṃįoaktseṃįoaktsut
inessiveṃįoaktsimutṃįoaktsisit
illativeṃįoaktsetṃįoaktsuttut
elativeṃįoaktsinnitṃįoaktsingit
comitativeṃįoaktsigutṃįoaktsein
essiveṃįaskỉtsṃįaskỉttset
puoƛvi puoḷvesingularplural

‘otter’

asematicpuoƛvipuoƛvegi
sematicpuoḷvepuoḷvut
inessivepuoḷvimutpuoḷvisit
illativepuoḷvetpuoḷvuttut
elativepuoḷvinnitpuoḷvingit
comitativepuoḷvigutpuoḷvein
essivepuoƛvỉtspuoƛvỉttset
nỉbma nįammosingularplural

‘coniferous bark’

asematicnỉbmanỉbmogi
sematicnįammonįammit
inessivenįammumitnįammusut
illativenįammotnįammittit
elativenįammunnitnįammungit
comitativenįammugitnįammuin
essivenỉbmảtsnỉbmảttset
tṃůġla tṃeůklůsingularplural

‘psychedelic mushroom’

asematictṃůġlatṃůġlůgi
sematictṃeůklůtṃeůklyt
inessivetṃeůklymittṃeůklysyt
illativetṃeůklůttṃeůklyttyt
elativetṃeůklynnittṃeůklyngit
comitativetṃeůklygittṃeůklůin
essivetṃůġlảtstṃůġlảttsůt
§4.3.1.5 Enteraphonic Symphonic Nouns

Enteraphonic symphonic nouns are vowel-initial nouns whose nucleus has the same polarity as its last vowel. Such nouns have contrapolar apophony (except front-rounded nuclei, which are always propolar) and have a sematic ending in -en/-on/-ůn.

iri ỉrronsingularplural

‘deciduous bark’

asematiciriiregi
sematicỉrronỉrrut
inessiveỉrrummitỉrrusut
illativeỉrrotỉrrittit
elativeỉrrunnitỉrrungit
comitativeỉrrukkitỉrruin
essiveirỉtsirỉttset
eitsi įỉttsonsingularplural

‘wall, fence’

asematiceitsieitsegi
sematicįỉttsonįỉttsut
inessiveįỉttsummitįỉttsusut
illativeįỉttsotįỉttsittit
elativeįỉttsunnitįỉttsungit
comitativeįỉttsukkitįỉttsuin
essiveeitsỉtseitsỉttset
obbu vůappensingularplural

‘(old) man’

asematicobbuobbogi
sematicvůappenvůappit
inessivevůappimmytvůappisit
illativevůappetvůappyttyt
elativevůappinnitvůappingit
comitativevůappikkytvůappein
essiveobbủtsobbủttsot
yįįi ỷįůnsingularplural

‘spike’

asematicyįįiyįįůgi
sematicỷįůnỷįyt
inessiveỷįymmitỷįysyt
illativeỷįůtỷįyttyt
elativeỷįynnitỷįyngit
comitativeỷįykkitỷįůin
essiveyįįỉtsyįįỉttsůt
uvva ůvensingularplural

‘bumblebee’

asematicuvvauvvogi
sematicůvenůvit
inessiveůvimmytůvisit
illativeůvetůvyttyt
elativeůvinnitůvingit
comitativeůvikkytůvein
essiveuvvoatsuvvoattsot
ỉski įaktsonsingularplural

‘woman’

asematicỉskiỉskegi
sematicįaktsonįaktsut
inessiveįaktsummitįaktsusut
illativeįaktsotįaktsittit
elativeįaktsunnitįaktsungit
comitativeįaktsukkitįaktsuin
essiveỉskỉtsỉskỉttset
ůsky eůktsůnsingularplural

‘fold, roll, crease’

asematicůskyůskůgi
sematiceůktsůneůktsyt
inessiveeůktsymmiteůktsysyt
illativeeůktsůteůktsyttyt
elativeeůktsynniteůktsyngit
comitativeeůktsykkiteůktsůin
essiveůskỷtsůskỷttsůt
olkku vůalkensingularplural

‘temple’

asematicolkkuolkkogi
sematicvůalkenvůalkit
inessivevůalkimmytvůalkisit
illativevůalketvůalkyttyt
elativevůalkinnitvůalkingit
comitativevůalkikkytvůalkein
essiveolkkủtsolkkủttsot
eiḍbi įỉbbonsingularplural

‘carving knife, thin knife’

asematiceiḍbieiḍbegi
sematicįỉbbonįỉbbut
inessiveįỉbbummitįỉbbusut
illativeįỉbbotįỉbbittit
elativeįỉbbunnitįỉbbungit
comitativeįỉbbukkitįỉbbuin
essiveeiḍbỉtseiḍbỉttset
aiṃṃi oipṃonsingularplural

‘mistake’

asematicaiṃṃiaiṃṃegi
sematicoipṃonoipṃut
inessiveoipṃummitoipṃusut
illativeoipṃotoipṃittit
elativeoipṃunnitoipṃungit
comitativeoipṃukkitoipṃuin
essiveaiṃṃỉtsaiṃṃỉttset
aiƛṃi oilpṃonsingularplural

‘enemy, devil’

asematicaiƛṃiaiƛṃegi
sematicoilpṃonoilpṃut
inessiveoilpṃummitoilpṃusut
illativeoilpṃotoilpṃittit
elativeoilpṃunnitoilpṃungit
comitativeoilpṃukkitoilpṃuin
essiveaiƛṃỉtsaiƛṃỉttset
ama ảbmensingularplural

‘blood’

asematicamaØ
sematicảbmenØ
inessiveảbmimmytØ
illativeảbmetØ
elativeảbminnitØ
comitativeảbmikkytØ
essiveamảtsØ
§4.3.1.6 Enteraphonic Antiphonic Nouns

Enteraphonic antiphonic nouns are vowel-initial nouns whose nucleus has the opposite polarity to its last vowel. Such nouns have propolar apophony and have tripartite sematic endings in -en/-on/-ůn.

ủġġi ủtġensingularplural

‘unedible/unripe berry’

asematicủġġiủġġegi
sematicủtġenủtġut
inessiveủtġimmutủtġisit
illativeủtġetủtġuttut
elativeủtġinnitủtġingit
comitativeủtġikkutủtġein
essiveủġġỉtsủġġỉttset
anįi oadnįensingularplural

‘central beam in hut’

asematicanįianįegi
sematicoadnįenoadnįut
inessiveoadnįimmutoadnįisit
illativeoadnįetoadnįuttut
elativeoadnįinnitoadnįingit
comitativeoadnįikkutoadnįein
essiveanįỉtsanįỉttset
ỉįu įaįįonsingularplural

‘sap, resin, blood, power’

asematicỉįuỉįogi
sematicįaįįonįaįįit
inessiveįaįįummitįaįįusut
illativeįaįįotįaįįittit
elativeįaįįunnitįaįįungit
comitativeįaįįukkitįaįįuin
essiveỉįủtsỉįủttsot
eḍnįu eiṇṇįonsingularplural

‘pole, long stick’

asematiceḍnįueḍnįogi
sematiceiṇṇįoneiṇṇįit
inessiveeiṇṇįummiteiṇṇįusut
illativeeiṇṇįoteiṇṇįittit
elativeeiṇṇįunniteiṇṇįungit
comitativeeiṇṇįukkiteiṇṇįuin
essiveeḍnįủtseḍnįủttsot
illįu ỉlįonsingularplural

‘large tree’

asematicillįuillįogi
sematicỉlįonỉlįit
inessiveỉlįummitỉlįusut
illativeỉlįotỉlįittit
elativeỉlįunnitỉlįungit
comitativeỉlįukkitỉlįuin
essiveillįủtsillįủttsot
atġi oaġġensingularplural

‘bass’

asematicatġiatġegi
sematicoaġġenoaġġut
inessiveoaġġimmutoaġġisit
illativeoaġġetoaġġuttut
elativeoaġġinnitoaġġingit
comitativeoaġġikkutoaġġein
essiveatġỉtsatġỉttset
ỉrvu įaṛvonsingularplural

‘pine needle’

asematicỉrvuỉrvogi
sematicįaṛvonįaṛvit
inessiveįaṛvummitįaṛvusut
illativeįaṛvotįaṛvittit
elativeįaṛvunnitįaṛvungit
comitativeįaṛvukkitįaṛvuin
essiveỉrvủtsỉrvủttsot
ỷlda veylttůnsingularplural

‘hip bone’

asematicỷldaỷldogi
sematicveylttůnveylttit
inessiveveylttymmitveylttysyt
illativeveylttůtveylttittit
elativeveylttynnitveylttyngit
comitativeveylttykkitveylttůin
essiveỷldảtsỷldảttsůt

§4.3.2 Bisyllabic Consonantal Declensions

Bisyllabic consonantal noun end in a consonant which is modified in the sematic form and followed by a vowel, similar to consonantal declensions of monosyllabic nouns. Unlike archeaphonic and enteraphonic bisyllabic nouns however, most bisyllabic consonantal declensions do not undergo diaphony or apophony. Only nouns in -n and in -s are affected by diaphony.

§4.3.2.1 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -t

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -t have a sematic form in -e(n)/-o(n)/-ů(n). Eastern dialects lack nouns in -k in the asematic, which gives rise to three -t declensions – true -t nouns get -e/o/ů(n), and -t nouns which correspond to -k nouns in other dialects have a sematic form in -ġa, and -t nouns which correspond to - have -ġva. Bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -t are unaffected by diaphony.

Bisyllabic consonant nouns have three polarity series. Nouns in -et and -it follow the back polarity series, nouns in -ot, -ut and -at follow the front polarity series and nouns in -ůt and -yt follow the front-rounded polarity series. Tense vowels merge with lax vowels in the sematic singular and oblique cases except in the essive. Lax vowels merge with tense vowels in the sematic plural.

The sematic singular has two alternative forms, -e/-o/-ů or -en/-on/-ůn. The forms in -n are most common, but forms lacking it are favoured with possessive suffixes, for example ḷủlon or ḷủlo but sƛủluan ‘her/his language’ (rarely, if ever, sƛủlonan).

tṡettṡettṡettṡe(n)‘old man’
nįertetnįerte(n)‘pain’
ġůtġůtġůtġů(n)‘bullfrog’
eletele(n)‘open field, open grassy place’
ḷủlutḷủlo(n)‘language’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -t
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-et, -it-ot, -ut, -at-ůt, -yt-ekki, -ikki-okki, -ukki, -akki-ůkki, -ykki
sematic-e(n)-o(n)-ů(n)-eut-uit-eyt
inessive-immit-ummut
-ammut
-ymmit-eussut
-eyssyt
-eyssit
-uissit-eyssyt
illative-egot-oget-ůgůt-eittit-ủttut-eyttyt
elative-eunnit-uinnit-eynnit-eungit-uingit-eůngit
comitative-ittut-uttit-yttit-eun-uin-eůn
essive-ets, -its-ots, -uts, -ats-ůts, -yts-ettset, -ittset-ottsot, -uttsot,
-attsot
-ůttsůt, -yttsůt
ḷủlut ḷủlonsingularplural

‘language’

asematicḷủlutḷủlukki
sematicḷủlo~ḷủlonḷủluit
inessiveḷủlummitḷủluissit
illativeḷủlogetḷủlủttut
elativeḷủluinnitḷủluingit
comitativeḷủluttitḷủluin
essiveḷủlutsḷủluttsot
nįertet nįertensingularplural

‘pain’

asematicnįertetnįertekki
sematicnįerte~nįertennįerteut
inessivenįertimmytnįerteussit
illativenįertegotnįerteittit
elativenįerteunnitnįerteungit
comitativenįertittutnįerteun
essivenįertetsnįertettset
kįennut kįennonsingularplural

‘mallard duck’

asematickįennutkįennukki
sematickįenno~kįennonkįennuit
inessivekįennummitkįennuissit
illativekįennogetkįennủttut
elativekįennuinnitkįennuingit
comitativekįennuttitkįennuin
essivekįennutskįennuttsot
kirkkyt kirkkůnsingularplural

‘pine warbler’

asematickirkkytkirkkykki
sematickirkků~kirkkůnkirkkeyt
inessivekirkkymmitkirkkeyssyt
illativekirkkůgůtkirkkeyttyt
elativekirkkeynnitkirkkeůngit
comitativekirkkyttitkirkkeůn
essivekirkkytskirkkyttsůt
§4.3.2.2 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -k

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -k have a sematic form in -ġa, which is not distinguished in the asematic from -t consonantal nouns in Eastern dialects. Bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -k are unaffected by diaphony.

Bisyllabic consonant nouns in -k have three polarity series. Nouns in -ik follow the back polarity series, nouns in -uk and -ak follow the front polarity series and nouns in -ůk follow the front-rounded polarity series. The front-rounded series alternates between lax and tense – the asematic has -ů- everywhere except in the essive (-yts), and in the plural but the asematic and essive have -y- (-ykki and -yttsůt). In other words, -y- becomes -ů- before -k and in oblique cases but not the essive. Some speakers prefer -y- when preceded by another -y-, for example -ůġyt ⟫ -yġyt and -ůġyngit ⟫ -yġyngit. The illative plural has short forms in -eġtit/-oġtut/-ůġtyt.

asematicsematic
hulįukhulįoġa‘membrane, thin material’
heltṡikheltṡeġa‘burnt tree’
skorrukskorroġa‘hunched back, old person’
tůbbůktůbbůġa‘eastern phoebe (Sayornis phoebe)’
ůrůkůrůġa‘nature’
temůktemůġa‘elk antlers’
koḥukkoḥoġa‘half’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -k
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-ik-uk, -ak-ůk-ikki-ukki, -akki-ykki
sematic-eġa-oġa-ůġa-eġut-oġit-ůġyt
inessive-immit-ummut
-ammut
-ymmit-eġusut-oġisit-ůġysyt
illative-eġot-oġet-ůġůt-eġittit
-eġtit
-oġuttut
-oġtut
-ůġytyt
-ġtyt
elative-eġunnit-oġinnit-ůġynnit-eġungit-oġingit-ůġyngit
comitative-ikkut-ukkit-ykkit-eġuin-oġein-ůġůin
essive-its-uts, -ats-yts-ittset-uttsot,
-attsot
-yttsůt
hangak hangoġasingularplural

‘thick rope, cable’

asematichangakhangakki
sematichangoġahangoġit
inessivehangammuthangoġisit
illativehangoġethangoġuttut ~ hangoġtut
elativehangoġinnithangoġingit
comitativehangukkithangoġein
essivehangatshangattsot
ůrůk ůrůġasingularplural

‘nature, environment’

asematicůrůkůrykki
sematicůrůġaůrůġyt
inessiveůrymmitůrůġysyt
illativeůrůġůtůrůġyttyt ~ ůrůġtyt
elativeůrůġynnitůrůġyngit
comitativeůrykkytůrůġůin
essiveůrytsůryttsůt
heltṡik heltṡeġasingularplural

‘burnt tree’

asematicheltṡikheltṡikki
sematicheltṡeġaheltṡeġit
inessiveheltṡimmitheltṡeġusut
illativeheltṡeġotheltṡeġittit ~ heltṡeġtit
elativeheltṡeġunnitheltṡeġungit
comitativeheltṡikkutheltṡeġuin
essiveheltṡitsheltṡittset
§4.3.2.3 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in - have a sematic form in -ġva, which is not distinguished in the asematic from -t consonantal nouns in Eastern dialects. Bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -k are unaffected by diaphony. Like bisyllabic nouns in -k, nouns in - have three polarity series that are mostly identical. Nouns in - differ from nouns in -k only in that the sematic form is in -ġva, which affects the comitative singular by blocking gemination (-eġvon, -oġvon, -ůġvůn) and the asematic plural, which has forms in -ikvi, -ukvi, -akvi and -ykvi. Note that the word for eyes (a plural only noun) has a lax vowel in its plural: skenekvi, not *skenikvi.

asematicsematic
kulguḳkulgoġva‘abomasum’
pittṡuḳpittṡoġva‘crow’
nitṇiḳnitṇeġva‘annoyance, inconvenience’
stỉƛƛuḳstỉƛƛoġva‘calm, peace (from other people)’
soaruḳsoaroġva‘lower back’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -ḳ
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-iḳ-uḳ, -aḳ-ůḳ-ikvi-ukvi, -akvi-ykvi
sematic-eġva-oġva-ůġva-eġvut-oġvit-ůġvyt
inessive-immit-ummut
-ammut
-ymmit-eġvusut-oġvisit-ůġvysyt
illative-eġvot-oġvet-ůġvůt-eġvittit-oġvuttut-ůġvyttyt
elative-eġvunnit-oġvinnit-ůġvynnit-eġvungit-oġvingit-ůġvyngit
comitative-ikkut-ukkit-ykkit-eġvuin-oġvein-ůġvůin
essive-its-uts, -ats-yts-ittset-uttsot,
-attsot
-yttsůt
pittṡuḳ pittṡoġvasingularplural

‘crow’

asematicpittṡuḳpittṡukvi
sematicpittṡoġvapittṡoġvit
inessivepittṡummutpittṡoġvisit
illativepittṡoġvetpittṡoġvuttut
elativepittṡoġvinnitpittṡoġvingit
comitativepittṡukkitpittṡoġvein
essivepittṡutspittṡuttsot
skenekvi skeġvitsingularplural

‘eyes’

asematicØskenekvi
sematicØskeġvut
inessiveØskeġvusut
illativeØskeġvittit
elativeØskeġvungit
comitativeØskeġvuin
essiveØskenittset
ůmůḳ ůmůġvasingularplural

‘mold, humus’

asematicůmůḳØ
sematicůmůġvaØ
inessiveůmymmitØ
illativeůmůġvůtØ
elativeůmůġvynnitØ
comitativeůmykkitØ
essiveůmytsØ
nuįįuḳ nuįįoġvasingularplural

‘grandmother’

asematicnuįįuḳnuįįukvi
sematicnuįįoġvanuįįoġvit
inessivenuįįummutnuįįoġvisit
illativenuįįoġvetnuįįoġvuttut
elativenuįįoġvinnitnuįįoġvingit
comitativenuįįukkitnuįįoġvein
essivenuįįutsnuįįuttsot
§4.3.2.4 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -l

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -l have a single set of endings. The sematic form ends in -ƛa and there are three polarity series of case endings. A number of abstract nouns belong to this declension, which usually do not have a plural form. Bisyllabic consonant nouns in -l are unaffected by diaphony.

asematicsematic
tsengultsengoƛa‘clarity’
savvulsavvoƛa‘goal, destination’
kissulkissoƛa‘speed’
ussulussoƛa‘smoked fish’
tuṇṇiltuṇṇeƛa‘anxiety, nightmare’
uiniluineƛa‘truth’
ṡurįulṡurįoƛa‘rain in still weather’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -l
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-il-ul, -al-yl-ilki-ulki, -alki-ylki
sematic-eƛa-oƛa-ůƛa-eƛut-oƛit-ůƛyt
inessive-iƛumit
-immit
-uƛimut
-ummut
-yƛymit
-ymmit
-eƛusut-oƛisit-ůƛysyt
illative-eƛot-oƛet-ůƛůt-eƛittit-oƛuttut-ůƛyttyt
elative-eƛunnit-oƛinnit-ůƛynnit-eƛungit-oƛingit-ůƛyngit
comitative-illit
-iƛugit
-ullut
-uƛigut
-yllit
-yƛygit
-eƛuin-oƛein-ůƛůin
essive-iltsa-ultsa, -altsa-yltsa-ilttset-ulttsot,
-alttsot
-ylttsůt
tsengul tsengoƛasingularplural

‘clarity’

asematictsengultsengulki
sematictsengoƛatsengoƛit
inessivetsenguƛimut~tsengummuttsengoƛisit
illativetsengoƛettsengoƛuttut
elativetsengoƛinnittsengoƛingit
comitativetsenguƛigut~tsengulluttsengoƛein
essivetsengultsatsengulttsot
iįįiliįįeƛasingularplural

‘sugar’

asematiciįįiliįįilki
sematiciįįeƛaiįįeƛut
inessiveiįįiƛumit~iįįimmitiįįeƛusut
illativeiįįeƛotiįįeƛittit
elativeiįįeƛunnitiįįeƛungit
comitativeiįįiƛugit~iįįillitiįįeƛein
essiveiįįiltsaiįįilttset
tsiḷḷaltsiḷḷoƛasingularplural

‘frame’

asematictsiḷḷaltsiḷḷalki
sematictsiḷḷoƛatsiḷḷoƛit
inessivetsiḷḷaƛimut~tsiḷḷammuttsiḷḷoƛisit
illativetsiḷḷoƛettsiḷḷoƛuttut
elativetsiḷḷoƛinnittsiḷḷoƛingit
comitativetsiḷḷuƛugit~tsiḷḷullittsiḷḷoƛein
essivetsiḷḷaltsatsiḷḷalttsot
ṇyįįylṇyįįůƛasingularplural

‘cold wind’

asematicṇyįįylṇyįįylki
sematicṇyįįůƛaṇyįįůƛyt
inessiveṇyįįyƛymit~ṇyįįymmitṇyįįůƛysyt
illativeṇyįįůƛůtṇyįįůƛyttyt
elativeṇyįįůƛynnitṇyįįůƛyngit
comitativeṇyįįyƛygit~ṇyįįyllitṇyįįůƛůin
essiveṇyįįyltsaṇyįįylttsůt
§4.3.2.5 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -r

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -r have a sematic form in -ra, and the declension has three polarity series.

asematicsematic
hingurhingora‘person fallen in battle’
ṇįalburṇįalbora‘immature female cone’
tsambirtsambera‘flower that has lost its petals’
bįabmurbįammora‘elk/reindeer with one broken antler’
ṇakṡirṇakṡera‘wooded hillside’
kyndyrkyndůra‘ball of yarn’
ġyġġyrġyġġůra‘swan’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -r
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-ir-ur, -ar-yr-irki-urki, -arki-yrki
sematic-era-ora-ůra-erut-orit-ůryt
inessive-irumit
-immit
-urimut
-ummut
-yrymit
-ymmit
-erusut-orisit-ůrysyt
illative-erot-oret-ůrůt-erittit-oruttut-ůryttyt
elative-erunnit-orinnit-ůrynnit-erungit-oringit-ůryngit
comitative-irrit
-irugit
-urrut
-urigut
-yrrit
-yrygit
-eruin-orein-ůrůin
essive-irtsa-urtsa, -artsa-yrtsa-irttset-urttsot,
-arttsot
-yrttsůt
ṇįalbur ṇįalborasingularplural

‘immature female cone’

asematicṇįalburṇįalburki
sematicṇįalboraṇįalborit
inessiveṇįalburimut~ṇįalbummutṇįalborisit
illativeṇįalboretṇįalboruttut
elativeṇįalborinnitṇįalboringit
comitativeṇįalburigut~ṇįalburrutṇįalborein
essiveṇįalburtsaṇįalburttsot
ṇakṡir ṇakṡerasingularplural

‘wooded hillside’

asematicṇakṡirṇakṡirki
sematicṇakṡeraṇakṡerut
inessiveṇakṡirumit~ṇakṡimmitṇakṡerusut
illativeṇakṡerotṇakṡerittit
elativeṇakṡerunnitṇakṡerungit
comitativeṇakṡirugit~ṇakṡirritṇakṡeruin
essiveṇakṡirtsaṇakṡirttset
ġyġġyr ġyġġůrasingularplural

‘swan’

asematicġyġġyrġyġġyrki
sematicġyġġůraġyġġůryt
inessiveġyġġyrymit~ġyġġymmitġyġġůrysyt
illativeġyġġůrůtġyġġůryttyt
elativeġyġġůrynnitġyġġůryngit
comitativeġyġġyrygit~ġyġġyrritġyġġůrůin
essiveġyġġyrtsaġyġġyrttsůt
§4.3.2.6 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -s

Bisyllabic consonant nouns in -s have three different declensions. The simplest of those are bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -as and -us, which both have a sematic form in -a, without diaphony and only the back polarity series. Nouns in -is and -ys can either decline according to what is called the contracting -s declension or the non-contracting -s declension. Non-contracting -s nouns have a sematic form in -eha and -ůha, and are not affected by diaphony. All non-contracting -s nouns contain either an adiaphonic coda or a coda whose diaphonic series does not contain a voiceless or preglottalised cluster, which means that non-contracting -s nouns are not numerous. Contracting -s nouns end in -is or -ys and have a coda which must be able to undergo diaphony to give a voiceless or devoiced geminate or preglottalised cluster. A large number of -is and -ys nouns are derivative nouns that may carry a positive, diminutive or affective connotation, or be otherwise related to the word from which they are derived, for example soaƛƛi ‘fish’ but soaƛissoaƛƛa ‘little fish’, sakvin ‘man’ but sakvissakva ‘fellow, guy, little guy’, bįuḷḷu ‘boy’ but bįyḷḷysbįyḷḷa ‘little boy, good boy, son’ and iįįas ‘juice’ but iįįisihhįa ‘gel, jelly’.

§4.3.2.6.1 Bisyllabic Back Polarity Nouns in -s

The comitative singular has the form -ussit or -agit in free variation.

asematicsematic
dakṡusdakṡa‘ligament’
tohhustohha‘young (mammal)’
puoḍḍuspuoḍḍa‘navel, dimple’
nokusnoka‘stick’
ḷinkkasḷinkka‘boat’
geggusgegga‘duck (childish register)’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -us/-as
singularplural
asematic-us, -as-uski, -aski
sematic-a-it
inessive-imut
-imyt
-isit
illative-et-uttut
elative-innit-ingit
comitative-ussit
-agit
-ein
essive-uts, -ats-uttsot, -attsot
dakṡus dakṡasingularplural

‘ligament’

asematicdakṡusdakṡuski
sematicdakṡadakṡit
inessivedakṡimytdakṡisit
illativedakṡetdakṡuttut
elativedakṡinnitdakṡingit
comitativedakṡagit~dakṡussitdakṡein
essivedakṡutsdakṡuttsot
iįįas iįįasingularplural

‘juice’

asematiciįįasiįįaski
sematiciįįaiįįit
inessiveiįįimytiįįisit
illativeiįįetiįįuttut
elativeiįįinnitiįįingit
comitativeiįįagit~iįįussitiįįein
essiveiįįatsiįįattsot
ḷinkkas ḷinkkasingularplural

‘boat’

asematicḷinkkasḷinkkaski
sematicḷinkkaḷinkkit
inessiveḷinkkimytḷinkkisit
illativeḷinkketḷinkkuttut
elativeḷinkkinnitḷinkkingit
comitativeḷinkkagit~ḷinkkussitḷinkkein
essiveḷinkkatsḷinkkattsot
§4.3.2.6.2 Bisyllabic Non-Contracting Nouns in -s

Bisyllabic non-contracting nouns in -is or -ys have a adiaphonic coda or a coda which lacks voiceless or preglottalised clusters or consonants (with the exception of -bm- ⟫ -mm- ⟪⟪⟫ -m- and -dn- ⟫ -nn- ⟪⟪⟫ -n as well as geminated glides). Non-contracting nouns have the front and front-rounded polarity series of case endings. Voiced and non-preglottalised diaphonic codas include -ḍb- -ḍm- -ḍn- -ḍg- -ḍḍ- and -llį-.

asematicsematic
vỏskvisvỏskveha‘male elk’
billįisbillįeha‘little berry, child’
biltsġisbiltsġeha‘request, polite demand’
iltsġisiltsġeha‘small/right amount of force’
urtsƛisurtsƛeha‘itching bite’
kapṡiskapṡeha‘small catch’
ṛiksṇysṛiksṇůha‘old (useless) tool/thing’
nįůḍbysnįůḍbůha‘slug’
tṡiḍnystṡiḍnůha‘small pot’
ṛůllįysṛůllįůha‘melted fat’
miḍmismiḍmeha‘(light) complaining’
nįeḍḍisnįeḍḍeha‘young fir’
bisyllabic non-contracting nouns in -s
singularplural
frontfront-roundedfrontfront-rounded
asematic-is-ys-iski-yski
sematic-eha-ůha-ehut-ůhyt
inessive-ehimut
-iṃṃut
-ůhymit
-yṃṃit
-ehusut-ůhysyt
illative-ehot-ůhůt-ehittit-ůhyttyt
elative-ehunnit-ůhynnit-ehungit-ůhyngit
comitative-issit
-ihagit
-yssit
-yhagit
-ehuin-ůhůin
essive-its-yts-ittset-yttsůt
vỏskvis vỏskvehasingularplural

‘male elk’

asematicvỏskvisvỏskviski
sematicvỏskvehavỏskvehut
inessivevỏskvehimut~vỏskviṃṃutvỏskvehusut
illativevỏskvehotvỏskvehittit
elativevỏskvehunnitvỏskvehungit
comitativevỏskvihagit~vỏskvissitvỏskvehuin
essivevỏskvitsvỏskvittset
nįůḍbys nįůḍbůhasingularplural

‘slug’

asematicnįůḍbysnįůḍbyski
sematicnįůḍbůhanįůḍbůhyt
inessivenįůḍbůhymit~nįůḍbyṃṃitnįůḍbůhysyt
illativenįůḍbůhůtnįůḍbůhyttyt
elativenįůḍbůhynnitnįůḍbůhyngit
comitativenįůḍbůhagit~nįůḍbyssitnįůḍbůhůin
essivenįůḍbytsnįůḍbyttsůt
§4.3.2.6.3 Bisyllabic Contracting Nouns in -s

Contracting -s nouns are nouns whose coda undergoes diaphony which requires a voiceless consonant, consonant cluster or a preglottalised cluster. As such, all bisyllabic nouns in -is and -ys that can undergo diaphony towards a voiceless cluster, voiceless geminate consonant or a preglottalised cluster will decline according to the contracting -s declension with a sematic form containing a voiceless or preglottalised coda. Contracting -s nouns strongly favour meiophony if the result is voiceless or preglottalised. The reason for this is that in earlier stages of the language, contracting -s nouns had a sematic form in -h-a, where the -h- underwent metathesis and devoiced the preceding coda. Stops were initially preaspirated, which at a later stage of the language became preglottalised. Contracting -s nouns that already have an voiceless or preglottalised coda are unaffected by diaphony all together, but in some cases it may still occur, for example miƛkis ‘crab’ has two acceptable sematic forms: miƛka or milka. Bisyllabic -s nouns within the diaphonic series -bm- ⟫ -mm- ⟪⟪⟫ -m- and -dn- ⟫ -nn- ⟪⟪⟫ -n are part of the contracting declension but will generally have a sematic form in -pṃ- and -tṇ- respectively, switching diaphonic series. This is also true of -ll-/-l- and -rr-/-r- which have a sematic form in -ḷḷa and -ṛṛa. For example, dimis ‘little brother, bro’ has the sematic form dipṃa, not *dibma. Nouns whose coda is -įį- will have a sematic form in -hhį-, for example diįįysdihhįa ‘ear (botany)’, and codas in -vv-/-v- will have -pp-, for example pỉvvispỉppa ‘pole’. Likewise, ġaġisġatġa ‘little brother, bro’ (mostly synonymous to dimis but ġaġ- as a root for brother is used only with local participants, like sasa ‘sister’ and sasis sassa ‘little sister, sis’.

asematicsematic
tsalistsaḷḷa‘textile, material, element’
mįeilismįeiḷḷa‘crystal clear ice’
nyįįysnyhhįa‘energy, zeal’
nįaggisnįakka‘(small) pond’
kvaubmiskvaupṃa‘bear’
nemisnepṃa‘small room’
ġiḷḷisġiḷḷa‘slime, snot’
gvaykisgvaykka‘dog (endearing)’
ảnisảtṇa‘bean’
tsġuvistsġuppa‘symbol, icon, letter’
ninisnitṇa‘fragment, fraction’
yrġġysyrġa‘foetus’
iįįisihhįa‘gel, jelly’
ylkkysylka‘cavity’
vulkkisvulka‘carbon (element)’
miƛkismiƛka~milka‘crab’
bisyllabic contracting nouns in -s
singularplural
frontfront-roundedfrontfront-rounded
asematic-is-ys-iski-yski
sematic-a-a-ut-yt
inessive-umit-ymit-usut-ysyt
illative-ot-ůt-ittit-yttyt
elative-unnit-ynnit-ungit-yngit
comitative-issit
-agit
-yssit
-agit
-uin-ůin
essive-its-yts-ittset-yttsůt
kvaubmis kvaupṃasingularplural

‘bear’

asematickvaubmiskvaubmiski
sematickvaupṃakvaupṃut
inessivekvaupṃumitkvaupṃusut
illativekvaupṃotkvaupṃittit
elativekvaupṃunnitkvaupṃungit
comitativekvaupṃagit~kvaupṃissitkvaupṃuin
essivekvaubmitskvaubmittset
yrġġys yrġasingularplural

‘foetus’

asematicyrġġysyrġġyski
sematicyrġayrġyt
inessiveyrġymityrġysyt
illativeyrġůtyrġyttyt
elativeyrġynnityrġyngit
comitativeyrġagit~yrġyssityrġůin
essiveyrġġytsyrġġyttsůt
gvaykis gvaykkasingularplural

‘dog (endearing)’

asematicgvaykisgvaykiski
sematicgvaykkagvaykkyt
inessivegvaykkymitgvaykkysyt
illativegvaykkůtgvaykkittit
elativegvaykkynnitgvaykkyngit
comitativegvaykkagit~gvaykkissitgvaykkůin
essivegvaykitsgvaykittset
§4.3.2.7 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in - have a sematic form in -tṡa, with three polarity series of case endings, and the asematic endings are -iṡ, -uṡ/-aṡ or -yṡ. Many - nouns have a diminutive or descriptive meaning. Such nouns are unaffected by either diaphony or apophony.

asematicsematic
taltaṡtaltatṡa‘young elk’
tṡirtṇiṡtṡirtṇetṡa‘insect egg’
gůelgiṡgůelgetṡa‘small trout’
bebmyṡbebmůtṡa‘butt (childish language)’
kįulkuṡkįulkotṡa‘wolf cub’
vevviṡvevvetṡa‘raven’s nest’
ƛippyṡƛippůtṡa‘bonnet, cap’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -ṡ
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-iṡ-uṡ, -aṡ-ys-iṡki-uṡki, -aṡki-yṡki
sematic-etṡa-otṡa-ůtṡa-etṡut-ottṡit-ůtṡyt
inessive-etṡumit-otṡimut-ůtṡymit-etṡusut-otṡisit-ůtṡysyt
illative-etṡot-otṡet-ůtṡůt-etṡittit-otṡuttut-ůtṡyttyt
elative-etṡunnit-otṡinnit-ůtṡynnit-etṡungit-otṡingit-ůtṡyngit
comitative-iṡṡit
-itṡugit
-uṡṡut
-utṡigut
-yṡṡit
-ytṡygit
-etṡuin-otṡein-ůtṡůin
essive-its-uts, -ats-yts-ittset-uttsot, -attsot-yttsůt
taltaṡ taltotṡasingularplural

‘young elk’

asematictaltaṡtaltaṡki
sematictaltotṡataltotṡit
inessivetaltotṡimuttaltotṡisit
illativetaltotṡettaltotṡuttut
elativetaltotṡinnittaltotṡingit
comitativetaltutṡugit~taltuṡṡittaltotṡein
essivetaltatstaltattsot
kįulkuṡ kįulkotṡasingularplural

‘wolf cub’

asematickįulkuṡkįulkuṡki
sematickįulkotṡakįulkotṡit
inessivekįulkotṡimutkįulkotṡisit
illativekįulkotṡetkįulkotṡuttut
elativekįulkotṡinnitkįulkotṡingit
comitativekįulkutṡigut~kįulkuṡṡitkįulkotṡein
essivekįulkutskįulkuttsot
tṡirtṇiṡ tṡirtṇetṡasingularplural

‘insect egg’

asematictṡirtṇiṡtṡirtṇiṡki
sematictṡirtṇetṡatṡirtṇetṡut
inessivetṡirtṇetṡumittṡirtṇetṡusut
illativetṡirtṇetṡottṡirtṇetṡittit
elativetṡirtṇetṡunnittṡirtṇetṡungit
comitativetṡirtṇitṡugit~tṡirtṇiṡṡuttṡirtṇetṡuin
essivetṡirtṇitstṡirtṇittset
ƛippyṡ ƛippůtṡasingularplural

‘bonnet, cap’

asematicƛippyṡƛippyṡki
sematicƛippůtṡaƛippůtṡyt
inessiveƛippůtṡymitƛippůtṡysyt
illativeƛippůtṡůtƛippůtṡyttyt
elativeƛippůtṡynnitƛippůtṡyngit
comitativeƛippytṡygit~ƛippyṡṡytƛippůtṡůin
essiveƛippytsƛippyttsůt
§4.3.2.8 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -ts

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -ts have a sematic form in -va following a front vowel and -ha following a back vowel and have all three polarity series of case endings. Such nouns have a tense vowel, meanings bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts may end in -its, -uts/-ats or -yts. Many such nouns are diminutives, much like -s and - nouns, but -ts also carry a more poetic connotation, although many -ts nouns are neither diminutives nor poetic, for example eġġits ‘sausage’. The asematic plural of such nouns is in -ski or -ḍki (not *-tski), and the singular essive is in -ttsa, perhaps to avoid the asematic and essive converging. In archaic and poetic language, the semantic forms are often found in -da for all series. In poetic or archaic registers, endings in -oh- can be instead found as -u- (-ua, -uįa, -uit, -uỉn, -ovven in the singular, and -uit, -uisit, -uttut, -uingit, -uỉn).

Examples of monosyllabic simple -ts nouns:

asematicsematic
ṡengytsṡengůva‘maiden, daughter’
ỉskutsỉskoha‘young woman (poetic, diminutive)’
hotsatshotsaha‘baby tooth’
kůṡṡůtskůṡṡůva‘baby squirrel’
villytṡvillůva‘baby bird, small bird, bird (poetic)’
eġġitseġġeva‘sausage’
ġaġutsġaġoha‘(younger) brother’
sasutssasoha‘(younger) sister’
skinitsskineva‘ball’
selytsselůva‘bride’
ninytsninůva‘grain, particle, detail’
nengitsnengeha‘part, room’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-its-uts, -ats-yts-iḍki
-iski
-uḍki, -aḍki
-uski, -ask
-yḍki
-yski
sematic-eva-oha, -aha-ůva-evut-ohit, -ahit-ůvyt
inessive(-evumit)
-immit
-ohimut
-ummut
(-ůvymit)
-ymmit
-eussut-ohisit, -ahisit-eyssyt
illative-evot-ohet, -ahet-ůvůt-eittit-ohuttut, -ahuttut-eyttyt
elative-evunnit
-eunnit
-ohinnit, -ahinnit-ůvynnit
-eynnit
-eungit-ohingit, -ahingit-eyngit
comitative-ittsit
-ivugit
-uttsut
-uhigut
-ahagit
-yttsit
-yvygit
-evuin-ohein, -ahein-ůvůin
essive-ittsa-uttsa, -attsa-yttsa-ittset-uttsot, -attsot-yttsůt
ṡengytsṡengůvasingularplural

‘maiden, daughter’

asematicṡengytsṡengyḍki
sematicṡengůvaṡengůvyt
inessiveṡengymmitṡengeyssyt
illativeṡengůvůtṡengeyttyt
elativeṡengůvynnit~ṡengeynnitṡengeůngit
comitativeṡengyvygit~ṡengyttsitṡengůvůin
essiveṡengyttsaṡengyttsůt
ġaġuts ġaġohasingularplural

‘(younger) brother’

asematicġaġutsġaġuḍki
sematicġaġohaġaġohit
inessiveġaġohimut~ġaġummutġaġohisit
illativeġaġohetġaġohuttut
elativeġaġohinnitġaġohingit
comitativeġaġuhigut~ġaġuttsutġaġohein
essiveġaġuttsaġaġuttsot
skinits skinevasingularplural

‘ball’

asematicskinitsskiniḍki
sematicskinevaskinevut
inessiveskinimmitskineussut
illativeskinevotskineittit
elativeskinevunnit~skineunnitskineungit
comitativeskinivugit~skinittsitskinevuin
essiveskinittsaskinittset
§4.3.2.9 Bisyllabic Consonantal Nouns in -n

Bisyllabic consonant nouns ending in -n have a sematic form in -ma, and are affected by diaphony but not apophony, making bisyllabic -n nouns unique with respect to other bisyllabic nouns. They end in either a lax or tense vowel in the sematic (-in/-en, -un/-on, -an, -ůn/-yn) and have three polarity series of case endings. A relatively small number of bisyllabic nouns in -n end in -ỉn, whose sematic form is -ỉma, which are usually collective nouns or nouns denoting abundance of something or a place, for example hảmmỉnhảmỉma ‘climat’ or PỉƛƛỉnPỉƛỉma ‘Pine territory, Pine land’. Two nouns belonging to this declension have a unique sematic form: ṡinnenṡimma ‘lake’ and nennennemma ‘friend’. A large number of nouns in -un are nominalised forms of verbs, for example bįỏnun ‘play, game’ from bįỏdn- ‘play’. Bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -n form the largest bisyllabic consonantal declension. They are also unique in having a special sematic singular form for nouns in -an in -ama (instead of the expected -oma), and some speakers also use a special sematic plural form in -at instead of -ut. The asematic plural is in -ngi.

In more poetic or formal language and in some fixed expressions, the sematic singular ending -ma is replaced by -n, such that sakvin ‘man’ can be found both as sagvema or sagven. This short sematic form is sometimes found before certain postpositions, for example sagven laggi ‘in a decent/properly way (lit. like a person)’, in contrast with sagvema laggi ‘like a man’.

asematicsematic
gapsangapsama‘uterus’
gekkungeggoma‘hill(side), slope’
ġvibmenġvimmema‘grasshopper’
kįuomunkįuobmoma‘bend (in river)’
reƛṃenrelpṃema‘cricket’
ṡinnenṡimma‘lake’
nennennemma‘friend’
biktunbiġtoma‘sturgeon’
bolunbolloma‘bed’
gaulbungaulppoma‘world’
giṡkingitṡkema~giktṡema‘salmon’
sakvinsagvema‘man, person’
hůggůnhůkkůma‘difference, split’
mįiḍḍunmįiḍoma‘tar’
ủbunủppoma‘pipe’
passinpasema‘ear’
hįalkůnhįalgůma‘reindeer herd’
bisyllabic consonantal nouns in -ts
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-en, -in, -ỉm-on, -un, -an-ůn, -yn-engi, -ingi, -ỉngi-ongi, -ungi, -angi-ůngi, -yngi
sematic-ema, -ỉma-oma, -ama-ůma-emut, -ỉmut-omit, -amit (-amat)-ůmyt
inessive-immit, -ỉmmit-ummut, -ammut-ymmit-emusut, -ỉmusut-omisit, -amisit-ůmysyt
illative-emot, -ỉmot-omet, -amet-ůmůt-emittit, -ỉmittit-omuttut, -amuttut-ůmyttyt
elative-emunnit, -ỉmunnit-ominnit, -aminnit-ůmynnit-emungit, -ỉmungit-omingit, -amingit-ůmyngit
comitative-innit
-imugit
-unnut
-umigut
-ynnit
-ymygit
-emuin, -ỉmuin-omein, -amein-ůmůin
essive-ents, -ints, -ỉnts-onts, -unts, -ants-ůnts, -ynts-enttset, -inttset, -ỉnttset-onttsot, -unttsot -anttsot-ůnttsůt, -ynttsůt
gekkun geggomasingularplural

‘hill(side), slope’

asematicgekkungekkungi
sematicgeggomageggomit
inessivegeggummitgeggomisit
illativegeggometgeggomuttut
elativegeggominnitgeggomingit
comitativegeggumigut~geggunnnitgeggomein
essivegekkuntsgekkunttsot
giṡkin giktṡemasingularplural

‘salmon’

asematicgiṡkingiṡkingi
sematicgiktṡemagiktṡemut
inessivegiktṡimmitgiktṡemusut
illativegiktṡemotgiktṡemittit
elativegiktṡemunnitgiktṡemungit
comitativegiktṡimugit~giktṡinnutgiktṡemein
essivegiṡkintsgiṡkinttset
ṡinnen ṡimmasingularplural

‘lake’

asematicṡinnenṡinnengi
sematicṡimmaṡimmut
inessiveṡimmit~ṡimmumitṡimmusut
illativeṡimmotṡimmittit
elativeṡimmunnitṡimmungit
comitativeṡimmugit~ṡinnutṡimmuin
essiveṡinnentsṡinnenttset
hįalkůnhįalgůmasingularplural

‘reindeer herd’

asematichįalkůnhįalkůngi
sematichįalgůmahįalgůmyt
inessivehįalgymmithįalgůmysyt
illativehįalgůmůthįalgůmyttyt
elativehįalgůmynnithįalgůmyngit
comitativehįalgymygit~hįalgynnithįalgůmůin
essivehįalkůntshįalkůnttsůt
kannankadnamasingularplural

‘rocky slope’

asematickannankannangi
sematickadnamakadnamit, kadnamat
inessivekadnammutkadnamisit
illativekadnametkadnamuttut
elativekadnaminnitkadnamingit
comitativekadnumigut~kadnunnitkadnamein
essivekannantskannanttsot

§4.3.3 Bisyllabic Geminate & Diphthongal Nouns

A small number of bisyllabic nouns end in a geminate vowel or a diphthong. Such nouns are trisyllabic in the sematic form and follow exactly the declension of corresponding monosyllabic nouns. For example, pinnįůġapỉdnįỷ~pỉdnįeů ‘larch’ can also be found as pinnįeůpinnįůvvy, as though it was made up of pin+nįeů.

§4.4 Trisyllabic Nouns

Trisyllabic nouns in Pine are grouped into one of three subgroups. The first subgroup are the trisyllabic consonantal nouns. Trisyllabic consonantal nouns are declined more or less exactly like their bisyllabic counterparts, with only a few differences for specific cases, for example ṇukkohinṇuggohema ‘hat, headwear’. The second group of trisyllabic nouns are called apocoptic nouns, which form their sematic (or marked) form by reducing their third syllable to a word-final consonant, meaning they go from trisyllabic in their asematic form to bisyllabic in their sematic form, for example tuġamadvuoġġan ‘jawbone’. The third declension group are teleutophonic nouns, whose word-final syllable changes in a specific way and may be subject to diaphony (instead of the stressed coda in trisyllabic nouns), for example ỉ-ƛiggidunỉ-ƛiggitoma ‘decision’ (-idun ⟫ -itoma).

§4.4.1 Trisyllabic Consonantal Nouns

Like their bisyllabic equivalents, trisyllabic consonantal nouns end in a consonant, either -n, -s or -t, which is modified in the sematic form. Many nouns belong to this declension group. Most trisyllabic nouns ending in -un are teleutophonic because they are nominalised forms of bisyllabic verbs. Refer to bisyllabic nouns for the declension paradigms of trisyllabic consonantal nouns.

§4.4.1.1 Trisyllabic Nouns in -n

Most trisyllabic nouns in -n are derived from other words. Common derivational endings include -hin ⟫ -hema ‘clothing or tool’, -nin ⟫ -nema ‘container or place for something’ and -nan ⟫ -nama ‘person part of a group, person that does something’. Like their bisyllabic counterparts, trisyllabic nouns in -n undergo diaphony of their stressed coda.

asematicsematic
niddagannitagama‘lace’
ṇukkohinṇuggohema‘hat, headwear’
pallohinpalohema‘footwear’
atṇohinaṇṇohema‘gloves, mittens’
marƛohingimarƛƛohemut‘cutting tools (pl.)’
dulbohingidulppohemut‘sowing tools (pl.)’
mįiḍḍoninmįihonema‘container for tar’
įubboninįuponema‘soaking tub’
lįeḍḍeninlįehenema‘kettle’
nįagunannįakkunama‘victim’
ilginanilkkinama‘member of hunting group’
neninannedninama‘member’
§4.4.1.2 Trisyllabic Nouns in -s

As with trisyllabic nouns in -n, trisyllabic nouns in -s are mostly derived from nouns or verbs, and are all contracting nouns except for -skis ⟫ -skeha. Some common derivative endings include -(do)mis ⟫ -(do)pṃa ‘tool or instrument, place’, -(do)nis ⟫ -(do)tṇa ‘part of something (living)’, -kis ⟫ -kka ‘person or animal’, -dniski ⟫ -tṇit (pl.) ‘ceremonies’, -skis ⟫ -skeha ‘vulgar derivative’, -lis ⟫ -ḷḷa ‘diminutive or descriptive’, -ngis ⟫ -kna ‘resultative of translative verbs’.

asematicsematic
nendomisnendopṃa‘chair’
tsġuggomistsġuggopṃa‘pen, pencil’
ruoḍḍomisruoḍḍopṃa‘fire starter’
reġġomisreġġopṃa‘pulley’
daindůmisdaindůpṃa‘broom’
mindomismindopṃa‘cane’
pỉƛƛonispỉƛƛotṇa‘yolk’
aḍḍonisaḍḍotṇa‘sweat gland’
tekunistekutṇa‘kidney’
nįůlgůnisnįůlgůtṇa‘duodenum’
tevvinistevvitṇa‘testicle’
tsikvinistsikvitṇa‘egg white’
valbikisvalbikka‘water strider’
ṡelkakisṡelkakka‘racoon’
iƛƛakisiƛƛakka‘beauty, beautiful person’
bįaggukisbįaggukka‘little one, child’
tohhukistohhukka‘young one, youngster’
voavvukisvoavvukka‘strange person, weirdo’
iṡṡukisiṡṡukka‘old person’
tsġuḷḷukistsġuḷḷukka‘trouble maker, brat’
tṡitṇukistṡitṇukka‘person wearing ill-fitting clothes’
tserġġykistserġġykka‘hyperactive person’
tsotskukistsotskukka‘genius, brainiac, smarty-pants’
tṇỉmukistṇỉmukka‘new-born baby’
stalgukisstalgukka‘experienced person, expert’
skiggukisskiggukka‘poor, sickly person’
migvidniskimigvitṇut‘feast’
ƛunƛidniskiƛunƛitṇut‘funeral’
bidnidniskibidnitṇut‘homecoming’
nakvidniskinakvitṇut‘birth celebration’
tekuskistekuskeha‘moron’
pukniskispukniskeha‘someone who exaggerates, bullshitter’
ṛugguskisṛugguskeha‘bad husband’
vassiskisvassiskeha‘someone who ought to be ashamed, fool’
vungolisvungoḷḷa‘small river valley’
gukṇelisgukṇeḷḷa‘opening, sphincter, valve’
tṡylkůlistṡylkůḷḷa‘sleeve hole’
gaulkalisgaulkaḷḷa‘small village, camp’
kůįįůliskůįįůḷḷa‘short distance’
ṃakƛelisṃakƛeḷḷa‘spice, treat’
mitṇelismitṇeḷḷa‘small group’
vilvelisvilveḷḷa‘small bird, birdy’
sṇįaiḍkelissṇįaiḍkeḷḷa‘handkerchief, bandana, towel(ette)’
teṡṇolisteṡṇoḷḷa‘little surprise’
nildingisnildikna‘split (in wood)’
kuskungiskuskukna‘small cut’
skirttingisskirttikna‘concussion’
tỏltingistỏltikna‘tear (in fabric, skin)’
diringisdirikna‘swaying (of trees)’
nįůllingisnįůllikna‘bend (in wood, object)’
§4.4.1.3 Trisyllabic Nouns in -t

Trisyllabic nouns in -t are mostly derived from other words. Common derivational endings include-vut/-vyt ⟫ -von/-vůn ‘collective, derivative’, -(o)vut/-(e)vyt ‘country, land’ and -llit which forms nationality derivatives.

asematicsematic
tsiḷḷalluttsiḷḷallon‘framework, rule’
biltsġavutbiltsġavon‘instructions’
ilpevytilpevůn‘inflorescence’
bikvovutbikvovon‘shoreline, coast’
hyḍḍevythyḍḍevůn‘spectrum’
ƛikkovutƛikkovon‘orientation’
nįabnevytnįabnevůn‘(calf) litter’
gaulkovutgaulkovon‘community’
sakvevytsakvevůn‘society’
lủbmovutlủbmovon‘language family’
roktovutroktovon‘groom party’
suknovutsuknovon‘legislation, laws’
vilvevytvilvevůn‘flight, flock of birds’
sayƛevytsayƛevůn‘school of fish’
gvaikkevytgvaikkevůn‘total, universe’
miṇṇovutmiṇṇovon‘nation, country’
englanttullitenglanttullen‘English person’
kuokkullitkuokkullen‘foreign person’
suobmullitsuobmullen‘Finnish person’
norkkullitnorkkullen‘Norwegian person’
spảdnįallitspảdnįallen‘Spanish person’
duitsƛanttullitduitsƛanttullen‘German person’
įapanullitįapanullen‘Japanese person’

§4.4.2 Trisyllabic Apocoptic Nouns

Trisyllabic nouns whose sematic form is bisyllabic are called apocoptic nouns. Apocoptic nouns are not very numerous, as most trisyllabic nouns in Pine are derived, which then either decline as consonantal or teleutophonic nouns. A relatively small number of nominal roots form the majority of trisyllabic apocoptic nouns. Many are onomatopoeic in nature, and reduplication is somewhat common. Some derivational endings give rise to apocoptic nouns, especially those to do with botanical or animal nomenclature. Apocoptic nouns can be thought of as the opposite of bisyllabic consonantal nouns, whose asematic form has two syllables but whose sematic form has three syllables. The apocoptic declensions are not determined by the asematic form but grouped according to their sematic form. For example, apocoptic nouns in -t have a sematic form that ends in -t, but their asematic form may not contain a -t in as the onset of their last syllable, for example hamaggihoabmot ‘metal’. As such, one must know the sematic form of a trisyllabic apocoptic noun to know which declension it belongs to. Sematic forms dictate the declension of the oblique cases (except the essive) as well as the sematic plural. The noun hamaggi has the sematic form hoabmot, which then declines like a bisyllabic -t nouns, such that its illative form is hoabmuit. Only apocoptic nouns in -t behave like bisyllabic nouns in -t, other consonants have a unique declension different from bisyllabic nouns – apocoptic nouns with a sematic form in -n do not have -m- in oblique cases but keep the -n, as in takƛamitoaġƛan ‘nail’ has the illative form toaġƛanet, not *toaġƛomet as would be expected of a bisyllabic noun in -n.

Apophony of the stressed nucleus has the same polarity as the following vowel in the sematic form. In the example of takƛami, the stressed nucleus -a- becomes -oa- (back polarity) as the following vowel has back polarity, giving toaġƛan. In the noun gaugebi ‘crazy person’, the stressed nucleus -au- becomes -ay- as the following vowel as front polarity, giving gayhet.

§4.4.2.1 Trisyllabic Apocope

Apocope of trisyllabic nouns is the process by which the asematic form is changed to the sematic form, along with diaphony and apophony. The onset of the last syllable of the asematic form of an apocoptic noun becomes a word-final consonant. The table below shows what asematic final onsets (the onset of the last syllable of a trisyllabic noun) corresponds to what sematic word-final consonant and how it is declined in oblique cases (other than the essive). The illative is used to illustrate this.

sematic word-final consonantasematic final onsetillativeexample
-nall nasals-net, -not, -nůttakƛamitoaġƛan toaġƛanet
‘nail’
-l-l-, -ƛ--let, -lot, -lůtƛisƛeƛiƛỉsƛel ƛỉsƛelot
‘redwing’
-r-r-, -ṛ--ret, -rot, -růtkanarġakoadnar koadnaret
‘corner’
-tall stops-uit, -iut, -eůtgaugebigayhetgayhiůt
‘crazy person’
-ts-ts-, -tṡ, -ḍ--sset, -ssot, -ssůtsasṃetsasảtsṃetssảtsṃessůt
‘red sorrel’
-s-s-, -h--sset, -ssot, -ssůtkinuhakỉdnuskỉdnusset
‘rennet’
-Vː-ġ-, -ḥ-, -v-, -į--iut, -uit-/-aut, -ůvůt~-eůtġonuġƛaġvoadnủ ġvoadnuvet
‘molar’
§4.4.2.1.1 Apocoptic Nouns in -n

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is a nasal have a sematic form in -n, including preglottalised nasals and -tṇ-, -bn-, -bm- and -tṃ-. Case endings are added onto the sematic root by geminated the -n to give -n-. All three polarity series are found, and the final nucleus is tense (-in, -un/-an, -yn). A few derivative endings are part of this declension, including -ma (many tools and objects), -(n)nit (common plant suffix), -mi (found in a few anatomical terms, and used to derive types of hides of animals or certain textile-like materials, other derivatives), -tṇa (found in a few words denoting half of a pair), -nga (a group nouns), -(d)ni (some species of birds) and -bma (collective nouns). Nouns in -nga are so-called hemiplural nouns, meaning their asematic has no plural marker but all other cases (including the essive, which is in -ngatsot) are found in the plural.

asematicsematic
siġġumasỉġun‘drop’
muƛƛumamủƛun‘crumble’
rủvumarvuovvun‘blister’
tṡvaiḍḍamatṡvoihan‘condensation, dew’
tulpṇamadvuolbnan‘crack’
pỷknamapįeyngan‘swelling’
skeniknaskeidnin‘blind spot’
hẻpṃanahįoṃṃan‘exhaustion, burn out’
biuggunabįuokun‘obvious/visible place’
tỏgganatỏkun‘oven’
nỉnannitnįadnan‘moss campion’
mįaḷḷunnitmįoaƛƛun‘common butterwort’
bevvinnitbeyvin‘common moonwort’
dỷḷḷynnitdỷƛƛyn‘wild thyme’
takƛamitoaġƛan‘nail’
ṃįuġtomiṃįuoktun‘torso’
tuldamidvuolttan‘pelvis’
ṇįiremiṇįỉrrin‘nasal cavity’
maktomimoaġtun‘larynx, voicebox’
vỏskvummivuoskvun‘(male) elk hide’
gitṡkummigỉṡkun‘salmon hide’
gỉskummigįaktsun‘wolf hide’
tsaįįomitsoaįun‘lamb hide’
baltotṇaboaldun‘lower half’
hillotṇahỉlun‘upper half’
tsittotṇatsỉddun‘right half/side’
gatsṃotṇagoaḍmun‘left half/side’
atṇotṇaoaṇṇun‘single glove/mitten’
manginga~sasungamảkninyt~soassunit‘sisters (together)’
dimminga~ġaġungadỉbminit~ġoaġġunit‘brothers (together)’
nennenganeidninut‘friends (together)’
illįungaỉlįunit‘relatives’
kykydnikỷkkyn‘lesser common woodpecker’
dullįudnidủlįun‘Eurasian jay’
vuvvudnivủvun‘northern lapwing’
ġauġġudniġauġun‘short-eared owl’
miṇṇibmamỉtṇin‘group, band’
miggibmamỉkin‘tour, visit’
minibmamỉdnin‘procession, cortege’
ḷinkkabmaḷỉnkan‘squadron, group of boats’
ilgibmaỉlkkan‘travelling party’
maḍḍibmamảhin‘hunting party’
nenibmaneidnin‘group of friends’
tṡattṡibmatṡảtṡin‘litter (of mammals)’
teybibmateyppin‘litter (of birds)’
linnubmalỉdnun‘poem’
giggibmagỉkin‘collection’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -n
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-in-un, -an-yn-inut-unit-ynyt
inessive-immit-ummut-ymmit-inusut-unisit-ynysyt
illative-inot-unet-ynůt-inittit
-indit
-unuttut
-undut
-ynyttyt
-yndyt
elative-inunnit-uninnit-ynynnit-inungit-uningit-ynyngit
comitative-innit-unnut-ynnit-inuin-unein-ynůin
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-tsot-Ø-ttsůt
siġġumasỉġunsingularplural

‘drop’

asematicsiġġumasiġġumogi
sematicsỉġunsỉġunit
inessivesỉġummitsỉġunisit
illativesỉġunetsỉġunuttut ~ sỉġundut
elativesỉġuninnitsỉġuningit
comitativesỉġunnutsỉġunein
essivesiġġumatssiġġumattsot
bevvebnibeyvinsingularplural

‘common moonwort’

asematicbevvebnibevvebnegi
sematicbeyvinbeyvinut
inessivebeyvimmitbeyvinusut
illativebeyvinotbeyvinittit ~ beyvindit
elativebeyvinunnitbeyvinungit
comitativebeyvinnitbeyvinuin
essivebevvebnitsbevvebnittset
kykydnikỷkkynsingularplural

‘lesser spotted woodpecker’

asematickykydnikykydnegi
sematickỷkkynkỷkkynyt
inessivekỷkkymmitkỷkkynysyt
illativekỷkkynůtkỷkkynyttyt ~ kỷkkyndyt
elativekỷkkynynnitkỷkkynyngit
comitativekỷkkynnitkỷkkynůin
essivekykydnitskykydnittsůt
§4.4.2.1.2 Apocoptic Nouns in -l

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is a -l-, -- or -ƛ- have a sematic form in -l, preceded by a tense vowel in all three polarity series (-il, -ul/-al, -yl) which becomes lax in oblique cases (other than the essive, -el-, -ol-, -ůl-). Apocoptic nouns in -l include nouns in -ƛƛu or -ƛƛy (approbative diminutive or derivatives), -lba (derivatives related to botany), -ƛka (liquid derivatives), -lga (secretions, fluids), -ḷḷa (resultative of certain translative verbs, often technical terms).

asematicsematic
hỉmuƛƛuhįabmul‘darling’
kyƛƛyƛƛykỷƛyl‘little girl’
bįuƛƛuƛƛubįủƛul‘little boy’
ṃủsuƛƛuṃủssul‘puppy, little puppy’
nįertuƛƛunįeurttul‘poor (someone sick)’
ṇulduƛƛuṇuolttul‘poor (someone who hurt themselves)’
tsikvalbatsỉgval‘wood anemone’
eullolbaįủlul‘crocus’
skiggilbaskỉkil‘meadow buttercup’
sivuƛkasỉvvul‘thick liquid, fluid’
ṇįaisƛůƛkaṇįảsƛyl‘weak (tea/coffee), diluted liquid’
iįįiƛkaỉįil‘sirup, sirupy liquid’
tṡoaḷḷuƛkatṡoaḷul~tṡvauḷul‘dried liquid’
temalgateubmal‘diarrhea’
pykƛalgapiuġƛal‘spittle’
ṇįirralgaṇįỉral‘mucus, snot’
tekulgateukkul‘urine’
minnįulgamỉdnįul‘sperm’
ảmůlgaảbmyl‘menorrhea’
lįoįįolgalįỏįul‘pus (discharge)’
mỉgỉlgamįakil‘colostrum’
aukvuḷḷaaugvul‘curds, curdled liquid’
boiƛƛuḷḷaboiƛul‘coagulation, coagulated blood’
tṡorvuḷḷatṡoaṛvul‘rot, rotten wood’
ṛagguḷḷaṛoakul‘collapse, catastrophe’
kinkuḷḷakỉnkkul‘shock, trauma’
huoḥḥuḷḷahuoḥul‘depression’
stiḍḍuḷḷastỉhul‘lesion, injury’
lįutsuḷḷalįủttsul‘saturation’
ƛiknuḷḷaƛỉngul‘revelation, epiphany’
nakṇuḷḷanoaġṇul‘(bone) fracture’
pỉƛƛuḷḷapįaḷḷul‘hematoma’
ṛukƛuḷḷaṛvuoġƛul‘fainting, syncope’
ỉsipṇuḷḷaỉsỉbnul‘dementia’
tṡalpuḷḷatṡoalbul‘contraction’
tulpṇuḷḷadvuolbnul‘fissure, cleft’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -l
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-il-ul, -al-yl-elut-olit-ůlyt
inessive-elumit
-immit
-olimut
-ummut
-ůlymit
-ymmit
-elusut-olisit-ůlysyt
illative-elot-olet-ůlůt-elittit
-ildit
-oluttut
-uldut
-ůlyttyt
-yldyt
elative-elunnit-olinnit-ůlynnit-elungit-olingit-ůlyngit
comitative-illit
-ilugit
-ullut
-uligut
-yllit
-ylygit
-eluin-olein-ůlůin
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
skiggilbaskỉkilsingularplural

‘meadow buttercup’

asematicskiggilbaskiggilbogi
sematicskỉkilskỉkelut
inessiveskỉkelumit~skỉkimmitskỉkelusut
illativeskỉkelotskỉkelittit ~ skỉkildit
elativeskỉkelunnitskỉkelungit
comitativeskỉkilugit~skỉkillitskỉkeluin
essiveskiggilbatsskiggilbattsot
huoḥḥuḷḷahuoḥulsingularplural

‘depression’

asematichuoḥḥuḷḷahuoḥḥuḷḷogi
sematichuoḥulhuoḥolit
inessivehuoḥolimut~huoḥummuthuoḥolisit
illativehuoḥolethuoḥoluttut ~ huoḥuldut
elativehuoḥolinnithuoḥolingit
comitativehuoḥuligut~huoḥulluthuoḥolein
essivehuoḥḥuḷḷatshuoḥḥuḷḷattsot
kyƛƛyƛƛykỷƛylsingularplural

‘little girl’

asematickyƛƛyƛƛykyƛƛyƛƛůgi
sematickỷƛylkỷƛůlyt
inessivekỷƛůlymit~kỷƛymmitkỷƛůlysyt
illativekỷƛůlůtkỷƛůlyttyt ~ kỷƛyldyt
elativekỷƛůlynnitkỷƛůlyngit
comitativekỷƛylygit~kỷƛyllitkỷƛůlůin
essivekyƛƛyƛƛytskyƛƛyƛƛyttsůt
§4.4.2.1.3 Apocoptic Nouns in -r

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is a -r- or -- have a sematic form in -r, preceded by a tense vowel in all three polarity series (-ir, -ur/-ar, -yr) which becomes lax in oblique cases (other than the essive, -er-, -or-, -ůr-). There are only a few nouns that belong to this declension. Apocoptic nouns in -r include nouns in -ra (certain male animals or actors), -rƛa (small number of descriptives of movement or sound or liquids), -ri (a few words relating to burnt material), -rġa (a few names of ducks and birds), -rda (a few anatomical terms), -rttsa (a few terms related to woven or intertwined material, meshes), -rtṡa or -rkka (a few place names) and -iryt/-urit ‘person who does something (a lot, well)’ and

asematicsematic
kuḍḍuragvuohur‘male bear’
ġuġġuraġvuoġur‘male swan’
tiṃṃiratỉpṃir‘male arctic fox’
ƛunƛaraƛvuonƛƛar‘male plant’
guḷḷarƛagvuoƛƛar‘babbling, sound of slow moving water’
tṡunttṡarƛatṡuontṡar‘sound wet snow’
tukƛurƛadvuoġƛur‘sound of dripping water’
sƛuskurƛasƛvuoskur‘sound of wet clothes, shoes’
ḷyḷḷyrƛaḷỷƛƛyr‘sound of rushing water’
ƛoppurƛaƛvoabbur‘sound of something hitting water’
bulburƛabvuolppur‘sound of bubbling water’
kiƛurikỉƛƛur‘charred, dry wood’
baiƛƛyribaiḷḷyr‘burnt, charred food’
ṇurkuriṇuorkkur‘burnt forest’
lapṇariloabnar‘clothes with holes burnt through it’
tyrryrġatỷryr‘red-breasted merganser’
rekkirġareyggir‘great cormorant’
dedderġadeytir‘European shag’
biggirġabỉkir‘barrow’s goldeneye’
addardaoatar‘keel, sternum (on bird)’
missirdamỉsir‘guzzard’
skinirdaskỉdnir‘cerebellum’
unnurdavuodnur‘spinal cord’
mitṇirttsamỉṇṇir‘omentum, caul fat’
aḍnarttsaoaṇṇar‘fascia, casing’
tsallarttsatsoalar‘mesh (in fishing net)’
niltṡirttsanỉlttṡir‘birch root woven basket’
baltarttsaboaldar‘weaving loom’
IḍḍirtṡaỈhirtopynym
TṡanartṡaTṡoadnartoponym
KenkirkkaKeinkkirtoponym
kỉstirytkįatstir~kįastir‘someone who’s always in a hurry’
hartsurithoarttsur‘someone who fights a lot’
ƛisƛirytƛỉsƛir‘someone who sings a lot’
bauḷvuritbaulvur‘traveller, someone who travels a lot’
hįiḷḷirythįỉƛƛir‘witch, doctor, wiseman’
maivvirytmảvir‘someone who smiles a lot’
bevvirytbeyvir‘someone who wears a lot of jewelry’
eṡkviryteiktṡ(v)ir~eiṡkvir‘someone who never wants to do anything’
silkirytsỉlkkir‘(dog) who sniffs a lot’
ritsirytrỉttsir‘someone who complains a lot’
migvirytmỉkvir‘someone who eats a lot’
lỏmuritlỏbmur‘someone who sleeps a lot’
vokkuritvoaggur‘someone who is scared of everything’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -r
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-ir-ur, -ar-yr-erut-orit-ůryt
inessive-erumit
-immit
-orimut
-ummut
-ůrymit
-ymmit
-erusut-orisit-ůrysyt
illative-erot-oret-ůrůt-erittit
-irdit
-oruttut
-urdut
-ůryttyt
-yrdyt
elative-erunnit-orinnit-ůrynnit-erungit-oringit-ůryngit
comitative-irrit
-irugit
-urrut
-urigut
-yrrit
-yrygit
-eruin-orein-ůrůin
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
tukƛurƛadvuoġƛursingularplural

‘sound of dripping water’

asematictukƛurƛatukƛurƛogi
sematicdvuoġƛurdvuoġƛorit
inessivedvuoġƛorimut~dvuoġƛummitdvuoġƛorisit
illativedvuoġƛoretdvuoġƛoruttut ~ dvuoġƛurdut
elativedvuoġƛorinnitdvuoġƛoringit
comitativedvuoġƛurigut~dvuoġƛurrutdvuoġƛorein
essivetukƛurƛatstukƛurƛattsot
hįiḷḷirythįỉƛƛirsingularplural

‘witch’

asematichįiḷḷirythįiḷḷirykki
sematichįỉƛƛirhįỉƛƛerut
inessivehįỉƛƛerumit~hįỉƛƛimmithįỉƛƛerusut
illativehįỉƛƛerothįỉƛƛerittit ~ hįỉƛƛirdit
elativehįỉƛƛerunnithįỉƛƛerungit
comitativehįỉƛƛirugit~hįỉƛƛirrithįỉƛƛeruin
essivehįiḷḷirytshįiḷḷiryttsůt
tyrryrġatỷryrsingularplural

‘red-breasted merganser’

asematictyrryrġatyrryrġůgi
sematictỷryrtỷrůryt
inessivetỷrůrymit~tỷrymmittỷrůrysyt
illativetỷrůrůttỷrůryttyt ~ tỷryrdyt
elativetỷrůrynnittỷrůryngit
comitativetỷryrygit~tỷryrrittỷrůrůin
essivetyrryrġatstyrryrġattsot
§4.4.2.1.4 Apocoptic Nouns in -t

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is a stop have a sematic form in -t, preceded by a tense vowel in all three polarity series (-it, -ut/-at, -yt) which becomes -į- in oblique cases (other than the essive, --, --, -ůį-). This is the largest apocoptic declension by number of words. Each stop series is described individually below.

§4.4.2.1.4.1 Apocoptic Nouns in -t: Labial Codas

Apocoptic nouns in -t whose last coda is a labial stop, including -pp-, -bb- and labial initial clusters -- (but not -bm- and -bn- which belong to apocoptic nouns in -n) include nouns ending in -bbu (diminutives), -bbi (some berries), -ppi (a few actor nouns, most female), -ppa (a small number of botanical terms relating to fungi), -ba (words related to sounds) and -ppit (descriptives of wet things).

asematicsematic
tṡettṡebbutṡeytṡit‘old man, grandpa’
ƛunnubbuƛvuodnut‘scrawny person’
įussubbuįủsut‘someone to small for their clothes’
daidnebbydảnnit‘clean-freak, germophobe’
vuggabbivuokat~vủkat‘crowberry’
auggibbiaykit‘raspberry’
minnįibbimỉdnįit‘redcurrant’
sekƛappiseuġƛat‘nanny’
tyġyppitỷġġyt‘nay-sayer’
koldappigvoalttat‘nursing mother (animal)’
miṡkappimỉktṡat‘nurse’
pỉƛƛappapįaḷḷat‘fly agaric’
skiggippaskỉkit‘larch bolete’
ỉbbippaįappit~įapit‘bolete’ṇakkabaṇoaggat‘sound of (wood) breaking’
tsġarrabatsġoarat‘sound of walking in cold snow’
ƛurkubaƛvuorkkut‘sound of walking on wood’
baknababoangat‘sound of banking, knocking’
ƛaiƛƛabaƛoiƛat‘sound of glass breaking’
illippitỉlit‘wet grass’
tuƛṃuppitduolpṃut‘wet clothes’
ṡiṡkappitṡỉktṡat‘wet shoes’
hiṡkuppithỉktṡut‘wet hair’
§4.4.2.1.4.2 Apocoptic Nouns in -t: Coronal Codas

Coronal apocoptic nouns in -t are those whose last coda is a -t- or -d- (excluding -dn-, which belongs to apocoptic nouns in -n). Such nouns include those ending in -ddit (derivatives of location, situation), -tka (bundles, types of weather), -tṇa (a few nouns related to sand, soil, powder) and -(u)tut/-(a)tit (various derivatives, often objects)

asematicsematic
balvodditboaƛvut‘lowland’
kảḷḷedditkayƛƛit‘highland’
iḍnodditỉṇṇut‘marshland’
ilbatkaỉlppat‘wreath, bouquet’
paddatkapoatat‘fish tied together at the tail’
ṇįaḍḍatkaṇįoatstat~ṇįoahat‘fine mist’
vabnatkavoapṇat‘thick fog’
tṡoaḷḷatkatṡoaƛƛat‘dry weather
tṡůskytkatṡeůskyt‘cold weather during summer’
tṡůįįůtkatṡeůįyt‘nippy weather’
muskutṇamuoskut‘sandy soil’
tsuokkutṇatsuoggut‘soil covered in needles’
sƛikkutṇasƛỉggut‘muddy soil’
biḍḍitṇabỉhit‘marshy or wet soil’
marƛutit moarƛƛut‘knife holder’
kinnutitkỉdnut‘cheese cloth, intestines’
lįoaġnatitlįoaknat‘keyring’
ƛaiƛƛatitƛoiƛat‘sledgehammer, club’
maġlatitmoaklat‘hairbrush’
mẻįįatitmįoįat‘(butter) churn’
nuddututnủtut‘millstone’
orrutitỏrut‘socket, eye (of an axe)’
pinnututpỉdnut‘tail feather’
sainkkytytsảnkyt‘larynx, voice box’
§4.4.2.1.4.3 Apocoptic Nouns in -t: Dorsal Codas

Dorsal apocoptic nouns in -t are those whose last coda is a -k-, -g- or --. They include nouns ending in -kku or -kky (various descriptives or collectives), -kkit (many insects and birds) and -kvi (abstract collectives or derivatives).

asematicsematic
huhikkupůeḍḍit‘flash’
gaksikkugoassit‘sliver of moon’
bikkukkubỉggut‘inlet’
duįukkudvuoįut‘chaos, mayhem’
kįamakkukįoabmat‘window’
linokkulỉdnut‘text’
vulkukkitvuolkkutnebria rufescens
tavvakkittoavat‘daddy long-legs’
dyrykkitdỷrryt‘crane fly (tipula rufina)’
ảmykkitảbmyt‘tick’
ủbbukkitvuoput‘midge’
kissikvikỉsit‘structure, skeleton’
illįukviỉlįut‘extended family’
iltṇikviỉlnit‘nobility, royalty’
neskukvineuktsut‘interrogation, challenge, question’
algnakvioalknat‘foundation, basis’
birgakvibỉrkkat‘requirement, necessity’
gemikvigeibmit‘emotion, state of mind’
kinekvikỉdnit‘population, stock’
lủmakvilủbmat‘saying, expression, idiom’
baltukviboaldut‘hierarchy’
nįavakvinįoavvat‘yield, efficiency’
tsarġġikvitsảrġit‘stimulus, ’
ḷủlakviḷủllat‘speech’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -t
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-it-ut, -at-yt-eut-uit-eyt
inessive-immit-ummut
-ammut
-ymmit-eussut
-eyssyt
-eyssit
-uissit-eyssyt
illative-egot-oget-ůgůt-eittit-uittit-eyttyt
elative-eunnit-uinnit-eynnit-eungit~-eyngit-uingit-eůngit
comitative-ittit-uttut-yttit-eun~-eyn-uin-eůn
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
vuggabbivuokatsingularplural

‘crowberry’

asematicvuggabbivuggabbegi
sematicvuokatvuokuit
inessivevuokammutvuokuissit
illativevuokogetvuokuittit
elativevuokuinnitvuokuingit
comitativevuokuttinvuokuin
essivevuggabbitsvuggabbittset
kảḷḷedditkayƛƛitsingularplural

‘highland’

asematickảḷḷedditkảḷḷeddikki
sematickayƛƛitkayƛƛeyt
inessivekayƛƛimmitkayƛƛeyssyt~kayƛƛeyssit
illativekayƛƛegotkayƛƛeittit
elativekayƛƛeynnitkayƛƛeyngit
comitativekayƛƛittitkayƛƛeyn
essivekảḷḷedditskảḷḷeddittset
dyrykkitdỷrrytsingularplural

‘crane fly’

asematicdyrykkitdyrykkikki
sematicdỷrrytdỷrreyt
inessivedỷrrymmit dỷrreyssyt
illativedỷrrůgůtdỷrreyttyt
elativedỷrreynnitdỷrreůngit
comitativedỷrryttitdỷrreůn
essivedyrykkitsdyrykkittset
§4.4.2.1.5 Apocoptic Nouns in -ts

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is -ts-, -tṡ- or -- have a sematic form in -ts, preceded by a tense vowel in all three polarity series (-its, -uts/-ats, -yts) which becomes -ss- in oblique cases (other than the essive, -ess-, -oss-, -ůss-). They include nouns in -tskva (nouns denoting noises), -tsƛa (some irresultative or unsuccessful derivatives), -tsġa (derivatives related to sudden changes), -ḍna (a few nouns denoting places or things no longer in use), -ḍḍa (some names of plants) and -ttṡa (a few nouns denoting types of meat).

asematicsematic
ḷuḷḷutskvaḷủƛƛuts‘sound of people talking, chatter’
ḷyḷḷytskvaḷỷƛƛyts‘sound of baby, babbling’
akkatskvaoaggats‘sound of people working, doing things’
miggutskvamỉkuts‘sound of someone eating’
tsinttsitskvatsỉntsits‘sound of someone drinking’
ṡuṡṡutskvaṡủṡuts‘sound of whispering’
kỏkkitskvakeůggits‘sound of people walking around
giuggitsƛagiukits‘avoidance, runaround’
soƛƛitsƛasůaƛits‘unsuccessful fishing’
dollitsƛadůalits‘perseverance, obstination’
mikƛitsƛamỉġƛits‘toiling, trials and tribulations’
doidditsƛadvaitits‘debate, pointless arguing’
dulbitsƛadvuolppits‘unsuccessful sowing’
ritsitsƛarỉttsits‘(unsuccessful) protest’
aiṡkitsƛaảktṡits‘cramming (last-minute studying)’
mitṡitsƛamỉttṡits‘futility, futile endeavor, (be) no use’
aivitsġaảvvits‘sudden sunny weather’
ṇįeḷḷitsġaṇįeiƛƛits‘fulminant sickness’
ṇỷḷḷitsġaṇỷƛƛits‘shock, stroke’
sakkitsġasảggits‘(sudden) disappearance’
ilppitsġaỉlpits‘puberty’
nutṇutsġanủṇṇuts‘fury, sudden anger’
ṛukkoḍnaṛvuogguts‘firepit (left by someone, not in use)
bakveḍnabảgvets‘abandonned house’
tselkvaḍnatseulgvats‘abandonned camp’
bỉṡkiḍnabỉtṡkits‘orphan’
ṛilgiḍḍaṛỉlkkits‘yellow bedstraw’
tsiggoḍḍatsỉkkuts‘northern bedstraw’
ṇuįįuḍḍaṇuoįuts‘white cottongrass’
iįįiḍḍaỉįits‘common polypody’
sukƛottṡasủġƛuts‘whale meat’
kaltṡettṡakảlttṡits‘elk meat’
kvaubmettṡakvaypṃits‘bear meat’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -ts
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-its-uts, -ats-yts-essut-ossit-ůssyt
inessive-essumit
-immit
-ossimut
-ummut
-ůssymit
-ymmit
-essusut-ossisit-ůssysyt
illative-essot-osset-ůssůt-essittit
-istit
-ossuttut
-ustut/-astut
-ůssyttyt
-ystyt
elative-essunnit-ossinnit-ůssynnit-essungit-ossingit-ůssyngit
comitative-ittsit-uttsut-yttsit-essuin-ossein-ůssůin
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
ritsitsƛarỉttsitssingularplural

‘(unsuccessful) protest’

asematicritsitsƛaritsitsƛogi
sematicrỉttsitsrỉttsessut
inessiverỉttsessumit~rỉttsimmitrỉttsessusut
illativerỉttsessotrỉttsessittit ~ rỉttsistit
elativerỉttsessunnitrỉttsessungit
comitativerỉttsittsitrỉttsessuin
essiveritsitsƛatsritsitsƛattsot
tsiggoḍḍatsỉkutssingularplural

‘northern bedstraw’

asematictsiggoḍḍatsiggoḍḍogi
sematictsỉkutstsỉkossit
inessivetsỉkossimut~tsỉkummuttsỉkossusut
illativetsỉkossettsỉkossittit ~ tsỉkustut
elativetsỉkossinnittsỉkossingit
comitativetsỉkuttsuttsỉkossein
essivetsiggoḍḍatstsiggoḍḍattsot
ḷyḷḷytskvaḷỷƛƛytssingularplural

‘babbling’

asematicḷyḷḷytskvaḷyḷḷytskvůgi
sematicḷỷƛƛytsḷỷƛƛůssyt
inessiveḷỷƛƛůssymit~ḷỷƛƛymmit ḷỷƛƛůssysyt
illativeḷỷƛƛůssůtḷỷƛƛůssyttyt ~ ḷỷƛƛystyt
elativeḷỷƛƛůssynnitḷỷƛƛůssyngit
comitativeḷỷƛƛyttsitḷỷƛƛůssůin
essiveḷyḷḷytskvatsḷyḷḷytskvattsot
§4.4.2.1.6 Apocoptic Nouns in -s

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is -s- or -h- have a sematic form in -s, preceded by a tense vowel in all three polarity series, which like nouns in -ts becomes -ss- in oblique cases (other than the essive). Nouns in -s- include nouns in -sƛa (words related to water, liquids), -ssut or -ssyt (certain fish) -sat (some flowers), -sit (some words related to hair or fur), -sta (a few words related to rivers or lakes), -ssin (nouns related to anatomy), -skva (a few derivatives related to natural products), -skvi (agent derivatives from nouns) and -(s)set (common in certain topographical derived terms).

asematicsematic
aįisitảįįis‘clear or potable water’
sƛikkusutsƛỉggus‘muddy, dirty water/liquid’
vulmusutvuolpṃus‘tea, medicinal drink’
iįįusutỉįus‘fresh sap’
ilįusutỉllįus‘sperm’
kunnusutgvuodnus‘strong alcohol, spirit’
kullusutgvuolus‘breastmilk’
ṃaktusutṃoaġtus‘(soup) stock’
ṃyvvysytṃỷvys‘saliva’
mieṡkasitmįektṡas‘plasma’
minnasitmỉdnas‘juice’
ảmyssytaybmys‘lamprey’
kuįįussutgvuoįus‘perch’
nultussutnuolttus‘muskellunge’
ḷįivvyssytḷįỉvys‘eel’
nįubbusatnįủpus‘thistle’
tsautsasattsauttsas‘water dock’
daldasatdoalttas‘golden root’
iskusatỉskus‘lady’s mantle’
kvaubmisitkvaymmis‘bear fur’
kyṡysitkỷṡṡys‘squirrel fur’
puoƛvisitbveyḷvis‘otter fur’
ṇukvustaṇuogvus‘mouth of river’
naḷḷistanảƛƛis‘fork (in river)’
nįůllůstanįeůlys‘oxbow lake’
ṇulkussunṇuolkkus‘membrane’
kolussungvoallus‘teat’
ṇukkussunṇuoggus‘scalp’
tsaƛussuntsoaƛƛus‘bladder’
vapṇiskvavảbnis‘smoked meat’
avviskvaảvis‘gas’
aḍḍaskvaoahas‘crystal’
biktiskvabỉġtis‘roe, caviar’
eliskvaeyllis‘peat’
heiḍḍaskvahįỉhas‘tumor’
ỉbbiskvaįapis‘blubber, adipose tissue’
skoaḥiskvaskayḥḥis‘keratin’
lįuḍḍuskvalįuohus‘mucosa, mucus membrane’
minnįuskvamỉdnįus‘uterus’
bįunnuskvibįuodnus‘joker’
pillaskvipỉlas‘trickster’
hįiƛƛaskvihįỉƛas‘someone who remembers everything’
ỉƛƛiskviįaḷḷis‘person who takes care of fire’
įosƛiskviįůasƛis‘trouble-maker’
pagguskvipoakus‘annoying person’
haluskvihoallus‘person with a strict routine’
tamassettoabmas‘place with a large topogr. feature’
toįossetdvoaįįus‘place with a large rock’
ṇuokkosetṇuokus‘wooded area’
ṡinessetṡỉdnis‘place with many lakes’
gekossetgeukkus‘hilly place’

There are only a handful of nouns in -ha (mostly places where something happens, some derivatives), and a good number of words in -hhįa (a few words indicating shortage or lack of something). Many locative nouns in -it or -in/-un sometimes have corresponding doublets in -uha, especially for general or abstract topography.

asematicsematic
temuhateubmus‘seat (in canoe)’
aiṡṡyhaảkṡys‘universe’
daldohadoalttus‘solar system’
nįůllyhanįeůlys‘bend (in river)’
hỉnuhahįadnus‘place where something accumulates, pile’
katskohhįakaḍkus‘desert’
miḍnohhįamỉtsṇus‘not having a cabin/anywhere to stay’
koṃṃehhįagvůaḍmis‘not having guests, isolation’
gintohhįagỉnttus‘lack of consciousness, coma’
hįiƛohhįahįỉƛƛus‘senility, dementia’
teṃṃohhįateupṃus‘depression, unhappiness’
mikvohhįamỉgvus‘famine, starvation’
angohhįaoaknus‘need of help, helplessness’
ảbmůhhįaảmmys‘anemia’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -s
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-is-us, -as-ys-essut-ossit-ůssyt
inessive-essumit
-immit
-ossimut
-ummut
-ůssymit
-ymmit
-essusut-ossisit-ůssysyt
illative-essot-osset-ůssůt-essittit
-istit
-ossuttut
-ustut
-ůssyttyt
-ystyt
elative-essunnit-ossinnit-ůssynnit-essungit-ossingit-ůssyngit
comitative-issut-ussit-yssit-essuin-ossein-ůssůin
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset, Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
naḷḷistanảƛƛissingularplural

‘river fork’

asematicnaḷḷistanaḷḷitsogi
sematicnảƛƛisnảƛƛessyt
inessivenảƛƛessymit~nảƛƛimmitnảƛƛessysyt
illativenảƛƛessůtnảƛƛessittit ~ nảƛƛistit
elativenảƛƛessynnitnảƛƛessyngit
comitativenảƛƛissytnảƛƛessůin
essivenaḷḷistatsnaḷḷistattsot
daldohadoalttussingularplural

‘solar system’

asematicdaldohadaldohogi
sematicdoalttusdoalttossit
inessivedoalttusimut~doalttummutdoalttossisit
illativedoalttossetdoalttossuttut ~ doalttustus
elativedoalttossinnitdoalttossingit
comitativedoalttussitdoalttossein
essivedaldohatsdaldohattsot
lįiddyssytlįỉtyssingularplural

‘eel’

asematiclįiddyssytlįiddyssykki
sematiclįỉtyslįỉtůssyt
inessivelįỉtůssymit~lįỉtymmit lįỉtůssysyt
illativelįỉtůssůtlįỉtůssyttyt ~ lįỉtystyt
elativelįỉtůssynnitlįỉtůssyngit
comitativelįỉtyssitlįỉtůssůin
essivelįiddvyssytslįiddyssyttsůt
§4.4.2.1.7 Apocoptic Nouns in -ġ

All trisyllabic nouns whose final coda is -ġ-, --, -v- or -į- have a sematic form in a long tense vowel, which becomes degeminated and lax followed by -v- in oblique cases (other than the essive), but the sematic plural has a geminated vowel of opposite polarity. Nouns in back vowels can have oblique cases in -u- or -a-, but the sematic plural only has -ỉt.

Words whose last onset is -ġ include nouns in -ġa (abstract nouns often derived from verbs), -ġġu or -ġġy (various descriptive derivatives), -vu (terms related to weather), -ġat (some tools, instruments or machines) and -ġma (various abstract derivatives of verbs), -ġi (some descriptives of hair, fur or clothing derivatives), -(k)uvut (reciprocal nouns), -ḥaut (negative nouns) and -įat (locative derivatives), -(u/a)įa (words related to odors and smoke), -vi (collection, collective, place with a lot of something) -va (various abstract derivatives, botanical terms). The inessive singular, inessive, illative, elative and comitative plural have long and short forms, with long forms being more common in higher registers.

asematicsematic
laldoġaloalttủ‘flash, glow’
spỉroġaspįarrủ‘spur, surge
siskoġasỉktsủ‘shock’
skirttoġaskỉrtủ‘quake, shock’
rủvoġġurvuovvủ‘wart’
ikoġġuỉkkủ‘issue, defect’
meuroġġumįủrrủ‘hurdle, challenge, obstacle’
ruroġġu, ryrůġġyrvuorrủ, rỷrrỷ‘confusing, disorder’
ṃiġtavuṃỉktả‘weather just before heavy rain’
gillįivugỉlįỉ‘downpour, heavy precipitation’
vabnuvuvoapṇủ‘low visibility weather’
koṡṡivugvůakṡỉ‘windy, stormy weather’
tṡůįįůġattṡeůįỷ‘icebox, refrigerator’
humoġatpuobmủ‘blinds’
daidneġatdảnnỉ‘cleaning product’
ỉįįuġatįaįủ‘something that gives power’
biṡtaġmabỉtṡtả~bỉṡtả‘bickering, squarrel’
bįodnaġmabįeůnnả‘humor, not being serious’
ġvevvaġmaġveyvả‘commotion, racket, ruckus’
keƛkaġmakeilkả‘digression, detour’
bulbuġmabvuolppủ‘activity, bustle, life’
tsisƛaġmatsỉslả‘excitement, energy’
ƛallaġiƛảlả‘long hair or fur’
boalmeġibvauƛṃỉ‘loose clothes’
elleġieylỉ‘cloak made of dried grass’
hamaġihaybmả‘armor’
hoaḷḷuġipauƛƛủ‘helmet’
ilbeġiỉlppỉ‘women’s summer clothes/dress’
bevveġibeyvỉ‘Pine regalia, traditional Pine clothing’
neskuvukkineuktsuvỉt‘news’
ỉliskuvutįalliskủ‘acquaintance, introduction’
alkkaḥautaylkả‘act of not giving, withholding’
tsaƛƛaįattsảƛả‘dam, flood(ed area)’
evveįatẻvỉ‘area covered in growth’
tṡẻlġġuįatṡolġủ‘smell of cooking’
rủvuįarvuovvủ‘smell of fire’
mįiḍḍuįamįỉhủ‘smell of tar’
amaįaảbmả‘smell of blood’
uṃṃuįavuopṃủ‘smell of fish’
ṡinnaįaṡỉdnả‘smell of lake water’
iįįuįaỉįįủ‘smell of resin’
įůlppůįaįeůlpỷ‘fresh smell’
hįiƛƛivihįỉḷḷỉ‘memory, mind’
tsaƛƛivitsảƛỉ‘waterway’
pỉƛƛivipỉƛỉ‘pine forest’
kunnivikỷnỉ‘oak forest’
lauggivilaykkỉ‘pile of log, place to keep logs’
trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -ġ
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-Ø-gi
sematic-ỉ-ủ, -ả-ỷ, -eů-ủt-ỉt-ỷt
inessive-immit-ummut, -ammut-ymmit-iussut-uissit, -aissit-ỷssyt
illative-iut-uit, -ait-eůt-ỉttit-ủttut, -auttut-ỷttyt
elative-iunnit-uinnit, -ainnit-eynnit-iungit-uingit, -aingit-eůngit
comitative-ikkut-ukkit-ykkit-iun-uin, -ain-ůvůin~-ỷn
essive-Ø-ts-Ø-ttset-Ø-ttsot-Ø-ttsůt
hoaḷḷupipauƛƛủsingularplural

‘helmet’

asematichoaḷḷuġihoaḷḷuġegi
sematicpauƛƛủpauƛƛỉt
inessivepauƛƛummutpauƛƛuissit
illativepauƛƛuitpauƛƛủttut
elativepauƛƛuinnitpauƛƛuingit
comitativepauƛƛukkitpauƛƛuin
essivehoaḷḷuġitshoaḷḷuġittset
gillįivugỉlįỉsingularplural

‘downpour’

asematicgillįivugillįivogi
sematicgỉlįỉgỉlįủt
inessivegỉlįimmitgỉlįiussut
illativegỉlįiutgỉlįỉttit
elativegỉlįiunnitgỉlįiungit
comitativegỉlįikkutgỉlįiun
essivegillįivutsgillįivuttsot
tṡůįįůġattṡeůįỷsingularplural

‘refrigerator’

asematictṡůįįůġattṡůįįůġakki
sematictṡeůįỷ~tṡeůįeůtṡeůįỷt
inessivetṡeůįymmittṡeůįỷssyt
illativetṡeůįeůttṡeůįỷttyt
elativettṡeůįeynnittṡeůįeůngit
comitativetṡeůįykkittṡeůįůin
essivetṡůįįůġatstṡůįįůġattsot

§4.4.3 Teleutophonic Nouns

Teleutophony is a type of declension pattern where a set ending, for example -illut will always have a corresponding set sematic form, here -iƛon, as in kunillutkuniƛon ‘made of oak’. Essentially all teleutophonic nouns are derivatives, either of verbs, adjectives or other nouns, and a significant number of adjectives are also teleutophonic, although teleutophonic adjectives are described in the section on adjectives as they also decline in ways that nouns do not, such as in the comparative and superlative. Teleutophonic declensions are dependent solely on the word’s last syllable, which makes them most similar to monosyllabic nouns. Teleutophony is unique in that diaphony does not occur in the stressed coda, but may instead occur in the coda of the set ending, although often deviating from normal diaphony seen in stressed codas – there are however two declensions where this is not true, teleutophonic nouns in -u and -at, which both undergo diaphony and apophony. For example, all verbs with the medials -ed- or -od- have a nominalised form in -iddun and -uddun, which have sematic forms in -itoma and -utoma respectively, for example ƛigged- ‘feel a certain way about something’ has the teleutophonic nominalised form ƛiggiddunƛiggitoma ‘attitude, approach’. The root onto which these endings are added are unaffected by diaphony or apophony. Another common teleutophonic forming suffixes are -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt, which form many abstract nouns from adjectives, for example iƛƛa ‘beautiful’ and iƛƛůhyt ‘beauty’. Such nouns have sematic forms in -ỉ/-ủ/-ỷ.

A number of specialised teleutophonic endings are described separately in §4.7.2 Toponyms, as they are only found in specific toponyms. All non-toponymic nominal teleutophonic endings will be described below.

§4.4.3.1 Teleutophonic Nouns in -det/-dot/-důt

Nouns ending in -det/-dot/-důt are abstract nouns usually derived from other nouns or pronouns that depict the abstract state or property of the noun. The endings are added directly onto the root of the word, deleting any previous consonant. The alignment of the ending agrees with the alignment of the stressed nucleus, but in cases where the stressed nucleus contains non-rounded front vowels (-e-, -i-), -důt is found, such as in nennen ‘friend’, which becomes nennedůt ‘friendship’ and not *nennedet. Note that ikkedet ‘fatherhood’ and gitṇedet ‘sameness, similarity’ do not follow this rule. Plural forms may be found but are not common. Such nouns are declined similarly trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -t, with the exception that the sematic vowel is geminated, which means that -det/-dot/-důt nouns have sematic forms in -ỉt/-ủt/-ỷt and in oblique cases have --/--/-- rather than --/--/-ůį-. This means that the sematic plural and singular are not distinguished for -důt nouns. The inessive singular, inessive, illative, elative and comitative plural have short and long forms, with long forms being more common in more formal registers.

asematicsematic
nennedůtnennỷt‘friendship’
bįuṡṡodotbįuṡṡủt‘criminality’
bỉṡkedůtbỉṡkỷt‘childhood’
nįelledůtnįellỷt‘size, bigness’
tankkodottankkủt‘kingship’
ummodotummủt‘motherhood’
ikkedetikkỉt‘fatherhood’
dimmedůt~ġaġodotdimmỷt~ġaġủt‘brotherhood’
mangedot~sasodotmangủt~sasủt‘sisterhood’
sakvedotsakvủt‘manhood’
ỉskedůtỉskỷt‘womanhood’
niṡƛedůtniṡƛỷt‘Pineness, Pine identity’
mitṇedůtmitṇỷt‘nationality’
illįedůtillįỷt‘kinship’
nannedotnannủt‘manyness, multiplicity, numerousness, crowd’
pavvedotpavvủt‘fewness, lack, paucity, scarcity’
nįukkodutnįukkủt‘muchness, multitude, volume, mass’
ninedůtninỷt‘fewness, scarcity’
gitṇedetgitṇỉt‘sameness, identicality, similarity’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -det/-dot/-dyt
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-det-dot-důt-dekki-dokki-důkki
sematic-ỉt-ủt-ỷt-ủt-ỉt-ỷt
inessive-ỉbmit-ủbmut-ỷbmit-iussut-uissit-ỷssyt
illative-iįot-uįet-yįůt-ỉttit-ủttut-ỷttyt
elative-ỉnnit-ủnnit-ỷnnit-iungit-uingit-ỷngit
comitative-ỉttit-ủttut-ỷttit-iįuin~-iun-uįein~-uin-yįůin~-eůn
essive-dets-dots-dyts-dettset-dottsot-důttsůt
nennedůtnennỷtsingularplural

‘friendship’

asematicnennedůtnennedůkki
sematicnennỷtnennỷt
inessivenennỷbmitnennỷssyt
illativenennyįůtnennỷttyt
elativenennỷnnitnennỷngit
comitativenennỷttitnennyįůin~nenneůn
essivenennedůtsnennedůttsůt
ummodotummủtsingularplural

‘motherhood’

asematicummodotØ
sematicummủtØ
inessiveummủbmutØ
illativeummuįetØ
elativeummủnnitØ
comitativeummủttutØ
essiveummodotsØ
ikkedetikkỉtsingularplural

‘fatherhood’

asematicikkedetØ
sematicikkỉtØ
inessiveikkỉbmitØ
illativeikkiįotØ
elativeikkỉnnitØ
comitativeikkỉttitØ
essiveikkedetsØ
§4.4.3.2 Teleutophonic Nouns in -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt/-auhut

Nouns ending in -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt are abstract nouns usually derived from bisyllabic adjectives that end in a vowel or -t that convey the abstract property expressed by the adjective. The endings are added directly onto the coda of vowel-final words, deleting the original vowel. The alignment of the ending agrees with the alignment of the stressed nucleus, but in cases where the stressed nucleus contains non-rounded front vowels (-e-, -i-), -ůhyt is found, such as in iƛƛa ‘beautiful’, which becomes iƛƛůhyt ‘beauty’ and not *iƛƛehit. Plural forms may be found but are not common. Such nouns are declined like trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -ġ. Some such nouns also have a secondary meaning of a person characterised by the adjective, such that iƛƛůhyt can also mean ‘a very beautiful person’, much like in English where beauty is both an abstract noun and can refer to a person. Likewise, kảḷḷehit can mean someone who is uncharacteristically tall. The comitative plural has short and long forms, with long forms being more common in formal registers.

Adjectives in -avut have a special abstract nominal form in -auhut, which has the sematic form -avủ.

asematicsematic
iƛƛůhytiƛƛỷ‘beauty’
hikvůhythikvỷ‘goodness’
hỏįohuthỏįủ‘heat, warmth’
tammohuttammủ‘size, bigness’
raykvůhytraykvỷ‘strength’
tunkvohuttunkvủ‘thickness’
tṡalpohuttṡalpủ‘tightness’
skuggohutskuggủ‘tiredness, fatigue’
sitvůhytsitvỷ‘intelligence’
migůhytmigỷ‘correctness, truth, right’
huvvohuthuvvủ‘badness, weakness’
daidnehitdaidnỉ‘cleanliness’
aįohutaįủ‘clarity’
nįoddohutnįoddủ‘length’
kảḷḷehitkảḷḷỉ‘height’
iggauhutiggavủ‘good-naturedness’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-ehit-ohut-ůhyt-ehikki-ohukki-ůhykki
sematic-ỉ-ủ-ỷ-ủt-ỉt-ỷt
inessive-immit-ummut-ymmit-iussut-uissit-ỷssyt
illative-iut-uit-eůt-ỉttit-ủttut-ỷttyt
elative-iunnit-uinnit-eynnit-iungit-uingit-eůngit
comitative-ikkut-ukkit-ykkit-ihuin~-iun-uhein~-uin-ůhůin~-ỷn
essive-ehits-ohuts-ůhyts-ehittset-ohuttsot-ůhyttsůt
daidnehitdaidnỉsingularplural

‘cleanliness’

asematicdaidnehitØ
sematicdaidnỉØ
inessivedaidnimmitØ
illativedaidneůtØ
elativedaidneynnitØ
comitativedaidnikkytØ
essivedaidnehitsØ
iƛƛůhytiƛƛỷsingularplural

‘beauty’

asematiciƛƛůhytiƛƛůhykki
sematiciƛƛỷiƛƛỷt
inessiveiƛƛymmitiƛƛỷssyt
illativeiƛƛeůtiƛƛỷttyt
elativeiƛƛeynnitiƛƛeůngit
comitativeiƛƛykkitiƛƛůhůin~iƛƛỷn
essiveiƛƛůhytsiƛƛůhyttsůt
tammohuttammủsingularplural

‘size, bigness’

asematictammohuttammohukki
sematictammủtammỉt
inessivetammummuttammuissit
illativetammuittammủttut
elativetammuinnittammuingit
comitativetammukkittammuhein~tammuin
essivetammohutstammohuttsot
§4.4.3.3 Teleutophonic Nouns in -hhit/-hhut/-hhyt

Nouns ending in -hhit/-hhut/-hhyt are abstract nouns usually derived from monosyllabic adjectives and adjectives that end in consonants other than -t as well as adjectives in -eįįi/-oįįu/-ůįįů (then -ehhit, -ohhut and -ůhhyt) that convey the abstract property that the adjective describes. The endings are added such that the word-final consonant is deleted and replaced by -hh-. The alignment of the ending agrees with the alignment of the stressed nucleus. Plural forms may be found but are not common. Such nouns are declined exactly like teleutophonic nouns in -ehit/-ohut/-ůhyt except that the sematic form is preceded by -h-: -hỉ, -hủ, -hỷ. The inessive singular, inessive, illative, elative and comitative plural have short and long forms, with long forms being more common in formal registers.

asematicsematic
tṡeyhhůttṡeyhỷ‘cold’
ƛunnuhhutƛunnuhủ‘flatness’
mỉdnohhutmỉdnohủ‘simplicity’
minnuhhutminnuhủ‘richness, abundance’
mįorrohhutmįorrohủ‘darkness’
ṃuohhutṃuohủ‘warmth’
ruorrohhutruorrohủ‘fogginess, lack of clarity’
ṃugguhhutṃugguhủ‘sulkiness’
ủahhutủahủ‘prettiness’
kỉhhitkỉhỉ‘newness, novelty, innovation’
lỏhhutlỏhủ‘slowness’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -hhit/-hhut/-hhyt
singularplural
frontbackfront-roundedfrontbackfront-rounded
asematic-hhit-hhut-hhyt-hhikki-hhukki-hhykki
sematic-hỉ-hủ-hỷ-hủt-hỉt-hỷt
inessive-himmit-hummut-hymmit-hiussut-huissit-hỷssyt
illative-hiut-huit-heůt-hỉttit-hủttut-hỷttyt
elative-hiunnit-huinnit-heynnit-hiungit-huingit-heůngit
comitative-hikkut-hukkit-hykkit-hihuin~-hiun-huhein~-huin-hůhůin~-hỷn
essive-hhits-hhuts-hhyts-hhittset-hhuttsot-hhyttsůt
tṡeyhhyttṡeyhỷsingularplural

‘cold’

asematictṡeyhhytØ
sematictṡeyhỷØ
inessivetṡeyhymmitØ
illativetṡeyheůtØ
elativetṡeyheynnitØ
comitativetṡeyhykkitØ
essivetṡeyhhytsØ
ṃuohhutṃuohủsingularplural

‘warmth’

asematicṃuohhutØ
sematicṃuohủØ
inessiveṃuohủmmutØ
illativeṃuohuitØ
elativeṃuohuinnitØ
comitativeṃuohukkitØ
essiveṃuohhutsØ
kỉhhitkỉhỉsingularplural

‘newness’

asematickỉhhitkỉhhikki
sematickỉhỉkỉhủt
inessivekỉhỉmmitkỉhiussut
illativekỉhiutkỉhỉttit
elativekỉhiunnitkỉhiungit
comitativekỉhikkutkỉhihuin~kỉhiun
essivekỉhhitskỉhhittset
§4.4.3.4 Teleutophonic Nouns in -ϕi

Nouns ending in -ϕi are derived from verbs (from the intransitive present hyponomous -ven) and are either agent or patient nouns denoting someone who performs an action or who experiences an action. Patient nouns contain the passive marker -ϕutuθ-, such that they end in -ϕussi, while agent nouns only have -ϕi. For example, the verb maḍḍ- gives maḍḍi ‘hunter’, and maḍḍussi ‘huntee, s/he who is hunted’. The ending -ϕi becomes -ϕem(a)- in sematic cases of the singular but -ϕ- in the plural, and the sematic plural is highly unusual in that it is -ϕaggi (originally the intransitive present hyponomous plural *-vat-gi) or alternatively -ϕaki. The plural sematic cases lack -emm- and are back-aligned. Passive nouns in -ϕussi have a sematic form in -ϕuss-emm(a)- identical to the active declension. Certain medials have special 'tense' forms before -ϕ- which also apply to these nouns, for example aįį·eg- 'teach' becomes aįįikk- before -ϕ-, and 'teacher' is therefore aįįikki.

asematicsematic
maḍḍimaḍḍemma‘hunter’
saƛƛisaƛƛemma‘fisherman’
gvaiƛisƛigvaiƛisƛemma‘starling’
telkkitelkkemma‘writer’
aįįekkiaįįikkemma‘teacher’
hartsaƛƛihartsaƛƛemma‘warrior’
ỉlttiỉlttemma‘host’
ỉlttussiỉlttussemma‘guest of host’
aįaƛƛiaįaƛƛemma‘student’
iṡṡiiṡṡemma‘parent’
miṡkanttimiṡkanttemma‘(traditional) doctor’
kuolttussikuolttussemma‘suckling’
mittimittemma‘scientist, specialist’
issisekƛiissisekƛemma‘protector’
issisekƛussiuisekƛussemma‘protectee, s/he who is protected’
lemppilemppemma‘worker’
uṡṡassi, uṡṡussiuṡṡassemma, uṡṡussemma‘stranger’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -vi
singularplural
asematic-ϕi-ϕaggi, -ϕaki
sematic-ϕemma-ϕit
inessive-ϕimmut-ϕusut
illative-ϕemet-ϕittit
elative-ϕeminnit-ϕungit
comitative-ϕimigut
-ϕikkut
-ϕuin
essive-ϕỉts-ϕỉttset
saƛƛisaƛƛemmasingularplural

‘fisherman’

asematicsaƛƛisaƛƛaggi~saƛƛaki
sematicsaƛƛemmasaƛƛit
inessivesaƛƛimmutsaƛƛusut
illativesaƛƛemetsaƛƛittit
elativesaƛƛeminnitsaƛƛungit
comitativesaƛƛimigut~saƛƛikkutsaƛƛuin
essivesaƛƛỉtssaƛƛỉttset
iṡṡiiṡṡemmasingularplural

‘parent’

asematiciṡṡiiṡṡaggi~iṡṡaki
sematiciṡṡemmaiṡṡit
inessiveiṡṡimmutiṡṡusut
illativeiṡṡemetiṡṡittit
elativeiṡṡeminnitiṡṡungit
comitativeiṡṡimigut~iṡṡikkutiṡṡuin
essiveiṡṡỉtsiṡṡỉttset
aįįikkiaįįikkemmasingularplural

‘teacher’

asematicaįįikkiaįįikkaggi~aįįikkaki
sematicaįįikkemmaaįįikkit
inessiveaįįikkimmutaįįikkusut
illativeaįįikkemetaįįikkittit
elativeaįįikkeminnitaįįikkungit
comitativeaįįikkimigut~aįįekkikkutaįįikkuin
essiveaįįikkỉtsaįįikkỉttset
§4.4.3.5 Teleutophonic Nouns in -u

Nouns ending in -u (-y in the case of front-rounded roots) are derived from passive verbs and form a nominalised passive patient, usually inanimate in nature, such that they often correspond to ‘that which is Ø-ed’, or it may also create nouns indicating the result of an action. Most nominalised passive patient nouns are in the weakest possible grade in the asematic when compared to the verb from which they are derived. The ending -u becomes -oga- (and -y becomes -ůga or -oga) in sematic cases. Apophony always proceeds towards back vowels, and teleutophonic nouns in -u do undergo diaphony. Not all nouns that may be understood to be result or nominalised passive patient nouns in -u are part of this declension, for example lįehhu ‘tea’ is has a sematic form in lįeyḍḍů, not *lįeuḍḍoga.

asematicsematic
miġvumỉkvoga‘food’
tsindutsỉnttoga‘drink’
linnulỉdnoga‘word’
tủludvuolloga‘thought, idea’
siḷḷusỉƛƛoga‘action, deed’
lembuleumppoga‘work’
alguoalkkoga‘gift’
baḍvuboatvoga‘catch’
ṛiḍįuṛỉḍḍįoga‘incision, cut’
kaugukaukkoga‘hit, strike’
issilủmuissilủbmoga‘pronunciation’
lukuluokkoga‘obligation, duty’
kaihykoiḍḍoga‘hole’
ƛisƛuƛỉsƛoga‘song’
ůlkyvuolkkoga‘enemy’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -u
singularplural
asematic-u-ogi
sematic-oga-ogit
inessive-ummut-ogisit
illative-oget-oguttut
elative-oginnit-ogingit
comitative-ukkit-ogein
essive-ủts-ủttsot
linnulỉdnogasingularplural

‘word’

asematiclinnulinnogi
sematiclỉdnogalỉdnogit
inessivelỉdnummutlỉdnogisit
illativelỉdnogetlỉdnoguttut
elativelỉdnoginnitlỉdnogingit
comitativelỉdnukkitlỉdnogein
essivelinnủtslinnủttsot
miġvumỉkvogasingularplural

‘food’

asematicmiġvumiġvogi
sematicmỉkvogamỉkvogit
inessivemỉkvummutmỉkvogisit
illativemỉkvogetmỉkvoguttut
elativemỉkvoginnitmỉkvogingit
comitativemỉkvukkitmỉkvogein
essivemiġvủtsmiġvủttsot
ůlkyvuolkkogasingularplural

‘enemy’

asematicůlkyůlkůgi
sematicvuolkkogavuolkkogit
inessivevuolkkummutvuolkkogisit
illativevuolkkogetvuolkkoguttut
elativevuolkkoginnitvuolkkogingit
comitativevuolkkukkitvuolkkogein
essiveůlkỷtsůlkỷttsůt
§4.4.3.6 Teleutophonic Nouns in -at

Nouns ending in -at are nominalised instrumental nouns, indicating tools or unagentive agents. Unlike most teleutophonic nouns, they undergo both apophony and diaphony (though apophony does not occur in the nucleus if a medial is present, and likewise diaphony occurs in the medial only). Most nominalised instrumental nouns are in the weakest possible grade in the asematic when compared to the verb from which they are derived, unless the verb itself is in the weakest grade, in which case the nominalised instrumental noun will be in the strongest grade. This applies to medials rather than the coda in verbs with medials, for example kuįįottatkuįįoddava ‘sharpening stone, sharpener’ from kuįį-od- ‘sharpen’. Such teleutophonic nouns in -at that contain a medial do not undergo apophony. The ending -at becomes -ava in sematic cases. Apophony always proceeds towards back vowels. The declension is similar to apocoptic nouns in -ġ, in that there are alternative forms for the inessive singular, inessive, illative, elative and comitative plural.

asematicsematic
aṃṃatoapṃava‘strap’
ẻḥḥatįoḥava‘fertiliser’
gitatgỉttava‘glasses’
kaihatkaiḍḍava‘shovel’
kilttṡatkỉltṡava‘fire-starter’
kuįįottatkuįįoddava‘sharpening stone, sharpener’
ḷįauvvatlįauvava‘grinder’
marƛƛatmoarƛava‘meat cleaver’
meṡpatmeuṡpava‘curdling agent, rennet’
gveiġvatgvỉkvava‘calling whistle or horn’
mirttṡatmỉrtṡavapicoué, resin gathering instrument’
ṃoaġtatṃuoaktava‘bellows’
ninttatnỉntava‘tool for counting, computer’
nįalkkatnįoalkava‘hook for hanging’
nįavvatnįoavava‘tool, instrument’
nįiġtatnįỉktava‘scraping tool’
nįirttatnįỉrdava‘splitting tool, shingle froe’
ombottat, omppatomboddava, vuombava‘hollowing chisel, gouge tool’
ṛiḍįatṛỉḍḍįava‘fish cutting knife’
ṛitṡkvatṛỉṡkvava‘cleaver, splitting wedge’
saṡṡatsoakṡava‘alarm’
sippistekkatsippisteggava‘narcotic, drug’
siuġlatsiuklava‘spindle’
ṡitġatṡỉġġava‘molar’
ṡtailgatṡtailkkava‘whip’
tsirtavvattsirtavava‘stimulant, stimulus’
tsġugattsġvuokkava‘pen, pencil’
tṡarvattṡoaṛvava‘allergen’
ulpṇatvuolbnava‘something that causes inflammation’
uġġatvuotġava‘weapon’
vuovvatvuovava‘hunting blind, hunting tower, tower’
trisyllabic teleutophonic nouns in -at
singularplural
asematic-at-akki
sematic-ava-avit
inessive-ammut-aissit
illative-avet-auttut
elative-ainnit-aingit
comitative-akkit~-ukkit-ain
essive-ats-attsot
nįavvatnįoavavasingularplural

‘tool’

asematicnįavvatnįavvakki
sematicnįoavavanįoavavit
inessivenįoavammutnįoavoissit
illativenįoavavetnįoavauttut
elativenįoavoinnitnįoavoingit
comitativenįoavakkit~nįoavukkitnįoavoin
essivenįavvatsnįavvattsot
kuįįottatkuįįoddavasingularplural

‘sharpening stone, sharpener’

asematickuįįottatkuįįottakki
sematickuįįoddavakuįįoddavit
inessivekuįįoddammutkuįįoddoissut
illativekuįįoddavetkuįįoddauttut
elativekuįįoddoinnitkuįįoddoingit
comitativekuįįoddakkit~kuįįoddukkitkuįįoddoin
essivekuįįottatskuįįottattsot
§4.4.3.7 Teleutophonic Action Nouns from Medial Verbs

A large part of teleutophonic nouns are derivatives of medial verbs. Verbs that contain medials are nominalised as action or result nouns through teleutophonic endings, which are usually a slightly modified form of the medial followed by -un. Such nouns describe either an action or verb noun of the verb, or may also form result nouns. Generally, teleutophonic endings from medials will have tense vowels and a geminate consonant followed by -un, such that -ed- becomes -iddun. The sematic form undergoes meiophony and behaves like a consonantal bisyllabic noun in -n, such that -iddun becomes -itoma. Some medials also have specific resultative derivational endings, for example verbs in -- have both an action noun in -uƛƛun (nakṇuƛƛun ‘breaking’) and a resultative noun in -uḷḷa (nakṇuḷḷa ‘fracture’). The resultative noun is usually more specific in meaning. Because of the changes to the medials, in certain cases two separate medials may converge and share an action noun teleutophonic ending, such as -is- ‘be in a certain state’ and -ess- ‘look/feel a certain way’ both have action nouns in -issun.

verb medialteleutophonic ending
-ed--iddun ⟫ -itoma
gipeġed- ‘describe’ gipeġiddun ‘description’
balted- ‘satisfy’baltiddun‘satisfaction’
aįed-‘explain’aįiddun‘explanation’
-od--uddun ⟫ -utoma
ṛukƛod-‘confuse’ṛukƛuddun‘confusion’
saskod-‘awake’saskuddun‘awakening’
-eg--iggun ⟫ -ikoma
aįįeg-‘teach’aįįiggun‘teaching’
heůkkeg-‘distinguish’heůkkiggun‘distinction’
nayskeg-‘make cry’nayskiggun‘making cry, provocation’
-og--uggun ⟫ -ukoma
tṡummog-‘endanger’tṡummuggun‘endangering’
skukkog-‘tire, annoy’skukkuggun‘annoyance, tiring’
kauḷįog-‘patch, mend’kauḷįuggun‘mending’
-itṡ--ittṡun ⟫ -itṡoma
tuƛṃitṡ-‘undress’tuƛṃittṡun‘undressing’
tṡukkitṡ-‘blunt’tṡukkittṡun‘blunting’
nunnuḥitṡ-‘appease’nunnuḥittṡun‘appeasement, assuagement’
-utṡ--uttṡun ⟫ -utṡoma
iṡṡutṡ-‘rejuvinate’iṡṡuttṡun‘rejuvination’
kvỉvutṡ-‘numb’kvỉvuttṡun‘numbing, anaesthesia’
raukvutṡ-‘weaken’raukvuttṡun‘weakening, debilitation’
-elt--ildun ⟫ -ilttoma
ḷủllelt-‘allow to speak’ḷủllildun‘turn to speak’
siḷḷusselt-‘allow to do’siḷḷussildun‘permission’
miggelt-‘allow to go’miggildun‘permission to go’
-isƛuθ-/-esƛ--isƛun ⟫ -isƛoma
sakƛisƛuθ-‘be rescued’sakƛisƛun‘rescue, being rescued’
ykƛisƛuθ-‘become fall’ykƛisƛun‘fall arriving, arrival of fall’
ṃolkentesƛ-‘start to look faded’ṃolkentisƛun‘starting to look faded’
-isteg--istiggun ⟫ -istikoma
kiṡtisteg-‘cause anxiety’kiṡtistiggun‘trauma, causing anxiety’
lỏmisteg-‘make sleepy’lỏmistiggun‘anaesthesia, sedative’
gakvisteg-‘make bitten’gakvistiggun‘insect attractant’
-iġƛuθ--iġƛun ⟫ -iġƛoma
kuokkaukiġƛuθ-‘be awestruck’kuokkaukiġƛun‘being awestruck’
pỉƛƛiġƛuθ-‘flush’pỉƛƛiġƛun‘flushing’
tṡvaiḍḍiġƛyθ-‘evaporate’tṡvaiḍḍiġƛůn‘evaporating, evaporation’
-unguθ- -ungun ⟫ -ungoma
hallunguθ-‘differ, get lost’hallungun‘difference, getting lost’
skenunguθ-‘go blind’skenungun‘going blind’
kỉtunguθ-‘lose calf’kỉtvungun‘loss of calf’
-uġten--uġtinnun ⟫ -uġtinoma
passuġten-‘deafen’passuġtinnun‘deafening’
palluġten-‘paralyze’palluġtinnun‘paralysis’
ṇukvuġten-‘make crazy’ṇukvuġtinnun‘perplexing, making crazy’
-is-/-ess--issun ⟫ -isoma
skukkis-‘be tired’skukkissun‘state of being tired, fatigue’
baltis-‘be satisfied’baltissun‘being satisfied, satisfaction’
tunnuvess-‘look heavy’tunnuvissun‘looking heavy’
-est-/-ist--istun ⟫ -istoma
iggest-‘make feel good’iggistum‘making feel good’
skukkist-‘make tired’skukkistun‘tiring, exhaustion’
tṡůivest-‘make cold’tṡůivistun‘making cold’
-ỉg--ỉggun ⟫ -ỉkoma
vapṇỉg-‘smoke (meat)’vapṇỉggun‘smoking’
ƛiggỉg-‘guide’ƛiggỉggun‘guidance’
koṃṃỉg-‘visit’koṃṃỉggun‘visit’
-am--ammun ⟫ -amoma
vapṇam-‘make smoke’vapṇammun‘making smoke’
miṡkam-‘make medicine’miṡkammun‘making medicine’
passam-‘happen rarely’passammun‘rare occurrence’
-eḍ--its ⟫ -eva
ilppeḍ-‘bloom’ilppits‘bloom(ing)’
ỷvveḍ-‘freeze over’ỷvvits‘freezing over’
ảṃṃeḍ-‘burn to embers’ảṃṃits‘burning to embers’
-oḍ--uts ⟫ -oha
nakṡoḍ-‘become forested’nakṡuts‘becoming forested’
ṃuoįoḍ-‘warm up’ṃuoįuts‘warming’
tṡalpoḍ-‘contract’tṡalputs‘contraction’
---uƛƛun ⟫ -uƛoma
įosƛiknuƛ-‘loosen’įosƛiknuƛƛun‘loosening’
nakṇuƛ-‘break’nakṇuƛƛun‘breaking’
ainyƛ-‘become clear’ainyƛƛůn‘clearing’
(ussiv)utuθ-(ussiv)uttun ⟫ -ϕ(ussiv)utoma
nįaṡkutu-‘be hidden’nįaṡkuttun‘being hidden’
nuṡkvutu-‘be killed’nuṡkvuttun‘being killed, murder’
mikvussivuθ-‘be edible’mikvussivuttun‘being edible’
-nuṡƛ--nuṡƛun ⟫ -nuṡƛoma
sƛiknuṡƛ-‘get covered in mud’sƛiknuṡƛun‘getting covered in mud’
tṇįultṇuṡƛ-‘get covered in bites’tṇįultṇuṡƛun‘getting covered in bites’
ảminůṡƛ-‘get covered in blood’ảminůṡƛůn‘getting covered in blood’
-nuṡk--nuṡkun ⟫ -nuṡkoma
sƛiknuṡk-‘go covered in mud’sƛiknuṡkun‘going covered in mud’
tṇįultṇusk-‘go covered in bites’tṇįultṇuṡkun‘going covered in bites’
ảminůṡk-‘get covered in blood’ảminůṡkůn‘going covered in blood’
-nuṡt--nuṡtun ⟫ -nuṡtoma
sƛiknuṡt-‘cover in mud’sƛiknuṡtun‘covering in mud’
tṇįultṇuṡt-‘cover in bites’tṇįultṇuṡtun‘covering in bites’
ảminůṡt-‘cover in blood’ảminůṡtůn‘covering in blood’

§4.4.4 Polysyllabic Nouns

Pine nouns that are non-teleutophonic, non-consonantal and more than three syllables long are called polysyllabic nouns. Most polysyllabic nouns are four syllable long, and such nouns are rather rare. Polysyllabic nouns are treated like similarly bisyllabic nouns (when they are four syllable long) or trisyllabic nouns (if they have five syllables), where the first two syllables are not affected. As the vast majority of such nouns are derived from other derivational suffixes, but they may differ from purely bi- or trisyllabic nouns in one important respect – vowel harmony is conserved, which means that if a four syllable word is formed on the basis of a suffix that has front or back forms, the apophony of the declinable suffix will proceed in the same direction as the formant from which it is derived. For example, a number of four syllable nouns end in -ỏmuna or -eůmůna that designate a region or territory where a language is spoken – one such noun is lỏlỏmuna ‘territory/region where eastern dialects are spoken’. The first two syllables of the noun, lỏlỏ- are only partially considered when declining the word, but only -muna is declined. Because -ỏm- is a medial which has front-rounded harmony and the form -ỏm- has a back polarity, the suffix -muna will not undergo front apophony as would be expected if it was a stand-alone word. Instead, it follows the polarity of the medial -ỏm- and only undergoes back apophony to -muodni (and not -můedni as would be expected). A number of polysyllabic formants derived from medials have alternative forms in -un, which are usually mostly synonymous, but polysyllabic forms may be understood to be more literal action nouns, for example mittuġanttun ‘reasoning, justification’ but mittuġantta ‘reasoning, justifying’.

Below are some examples of polysyllabic nouns:

polysyllabic formants from medials

Nominaliser of the medial -ġand-, from -ġma nouns

-ġantta-ġảnti/-ġoanti
asematicsematic
mittuġanttamittuġoanti‘reasoning, justifying, justification, rationale’
bulbuġanttabulbuġoanti‘revitalization, revitalizing’
vallaġanttavallaġảnti‘interpretation, interpreting’

Nominaliser of the medial -(i)neġ-

-(i)neġġa-(i)neiġo
asematicsematic
ikkaneġġaikkaneiġo‘being a father’
illįunneġġaillįunneiġo‘being relatives’
naukvaneġġanaukvaneiġo‘owning a dog’

Nominaliser of the medial -udduġ-

-udduġġa-uddủġi
asematicsematic
baƛṃudduġġabaƛṃuddủġi‘shoemaking’
miṡkudduġġamiṡkuddủġi‘medicine making’
tuƛṃudduġġatuƛṃuddủġi‘clothes making, tailoring’

Nominaliser of the medials -(in)ikkin-/-(un)ukkun-

-(in)ikkidna-(in)ikkỉnno
-(un)ukkudna-(un)ukvuonni
asematicsematic
bįukk(un)ukkudnabįukk(un)ukvuonni‘playing, playing with toys’
lỏm(un)ukkudnalỏm(un)ukvuonni‘pretending to sleep’
ṃairr(in)ikkidnaṃairr(in)ikkỉnno‘pretending to laugh’

other polysyllabic formants

‘time when’

-adni-ảnne/-oanne
asematicsematic
anilgảnadnianilgảnảnne‘time when birds start migrating away’
ḷįuḍkulġadniḷįuḍkulġoanne‘time when wood/leather is being soaked’
bįukkukkunadnibįukkukkunoanne‘time to play, playtime’

‘place where’

-una-uodni/-ůedni
asematicsematic
piuįįimunapiuįįimůedni‘place with snow on the ground’
huvvaįunahuvvaįuodni‘place where there is a bad smell’
ỉįaįunaỉįaįuodni‘place where it smells of resin’

§4.5 Irregular Nouns

Some nouns do not fall into any of the regular declensions described above. Such nouns are considered irregular and may adhere to one paradigm in some cases and another in other cases. present formpast form-ikn--ekn--ikk--ekk-present formpast form-ikn--ekn--ikk--ekk-present formpast form-ikn--ekn--ikk--ekk-present formpast form-ikn--ekn--ikk--ekk-present formpast form-ih--eh--ipp--epp--itt--ett--uh--oh-present formpast form-ih--eh--ipp--epp--itt--ett--uh--oh-present formpast form-ih--eh--ipp--epp--itt--ett--uh--oh-present formpast form-ih--eh--ipp--epp--itt--ett--uh--oh-present formpast form-in--en--il--el--iḷḷ--eḷḷ--ipp--epp--isk--esk--ikn--ekn-present formpast form-in--en--il--el--iḷḷ--eḷḷ--ipp--epp--isk--esk--ikn--ekn-present formpast form-in--en--il--el--iḷḷ--eḷḷ--ipp--epp--isk--esk--ikn--ekn-present formpast form-in--en--il--el--iḷḷ--eḷḷ--ipp--epp--isk--esk--ikn--ekn-present formpast form-its--ets-present formpast form-its--ets-present formpast form-its--ets-present formpast form-its--ets-These nouns will be detailed here.

§4.5.1 Irregular Monosyllabic Nouns

There are only six irregular monosyllabic nouns in Pine. Their declension pattern is determined by their sematic form:

asematicsematic
gįuolgįỷƛƛeů‘pine pollen’(mo.con.-l)
kṃoakṃayįįa‘gills (fungus)’(mo.diph.sym)
hủnpaƛƛa‘doe’(mo.con.-n)
ƛỉsƛỉksa‘larva’(mo.con.-s)
gảngevvama‘knee’(mo.con.-n)
tsỉltsỉƛken‘ant’(mo.con.-l, like hom.sym, as is *tsilku)

As such, the word gįuol has the sematic form gįỷƛƛeů and the rest of the declension conforms to that of monosyllabic complex -l nouns. The noun gản ‘knee’ has the sematic form gevvama and forms its other cases like front-aligning monosyllabic -n nouns (e.g. the inessive singular is gevvammit).

§4.5.2 Irregular Bisyllabic Nouns

Bisyllabic nouns that have an irregular declension are significantly more numerous than monosyllabic irregular nouns. They include the following nouns:

asematicsematic
hangahảįįỉ‘bullfrog’(het.sym, but like tri.apo.ġ)
hoahhapauḍḍon‘sky’(hom.sym, but propolar nucleus and -on)
dallįidảlįen‘time’(hom.ant, but propolar nucleus)
dapsadaussen‘older sister (archaic)’(het.sym, irr. diaphony -ps-⟫-ss-, -n)
kottakůaddi‘drizzle’(het.sym, no labialization)
kuktakůeġten‘carbon’(hom.sym, no labialization)
kunnakyni‘oak’(het.sym, no liabialization)
nennennemma‘friend’(bi.con.-n, truncated sematic root)
nįilinįỉllu‘north’(hom.sym, lack of hom. -n)
nįoarƛanįayrƛƛen‘axe’(hom.sym, irr. apophony -oa-⟫-ay-)
ṇulknuṇolgnen‘birch bark shavings’(hom.sym, irr. apophony -u-⟫-o-)
saḍnasảḍnen‘shadow’(no diaphony)
skenekviskeġvut‘eyes’(loss of -ne-)
soaƛƛisauƛen‘fish’(hom.ant, irr. apophony -oa-⟫-au-)
sukƛuseyġƛi‘whale’(het.sym, irr. apophony -u-⟫-ey-)
ṡiltṡitṡỉltṡon‘cranberry’(hom.sym, irr. onset tṡ-)
ṡinnenṡimma‘lake’(bi.con.-n, truncated sematic root)
ottiỏten‘deity’(ent.ant, irr. diaphony -tt-⟫-t-)
ottuġaỏtủ‘steam, breath, god’(tri.apo.-ġ, irr. diaphony -tt-⟫-t-)
ottunanỏtun‘person’(tri.apo.-n, irr. diaphony -tt-⟫-t-)
otturiỏtur‘pine’(tri.apo.-r, irr. diaphony -tt-⟫-t-)
tuvvatyvi, tyvyt (pl)‘year’(het.sym, irr. sem.pl in -yt)
bulġupoltġỉ‘pregnant trout’(het.sym, irr. and like tri.apo.ġ)
taṡkidảktṡỉ‘small white water river’(hom.ant, irr. d- and like tri.apo.ġ)

§4.6 Possessive Forms of Nouns

Nouns as well as adjectives functioning as nouns can be found in possessive forms, which include prefixes and suffixes that are similar to that of personal markings of intransitive verbs. For example, the word tsukṇi ‘knife’ can be found as ṇitsukṇeva ‘my knife’, ṇitsuoġnedda ‘to my knife’, pitsuoġningidotṡin ‘from our knives’. In some cases, the case ending of a noun will be modified by the presence of a possessive suffix. For example, the illative singular -et/-ot/-ůt when combined with the singular local possessive suffix -va become -evva/-ovva/-ůvva or more commonly -edda/-odda/-ůdda, while the singular non-local possessive suffix -a(mi) combines with the same illative endings to give -eda(mi)/-oda(mi)/-ůda(mi). Note that elative singular endings in -innit/-unnit/-ynnit are found as -ỉn-/-ủn-/-ỷn- with possessive affixes, and forms in -eunnit/-uinnit/-eynnit are -eunn-/-uinn-/-eynn-.

§4.6.1 Singular Local Possessive Affixes

The singular local possessive affixes are made up of a prefix, either p(i)- for the second person and ṇ(i)- for the first person, and the possessive affix -va. The prefix can be dropped if it is clear from context that the other reading is excluded, leaving only Ø-va.

pi-Ø-va‘your (sg)’
ṇi-Ø-va‘my’

The possessive affix -va becomes delabialised to -a, geminates final consonants (but oblique endings in -t becomes -vva or -dda), also causing voicing of stops, and causes any preceding vowel to become lax. Both forms are accepted, but forms in -iuva are considered more formal. Nouns that have an asematic plural in -egi/-ogi/-ůgi have the possessive suffix that precedes the plural marker -gi: -evagi/-ovagi/-ůvagi.

A summary of the rules that apply when adding the local possessive sufix -va is given below:

consonants

– Voiceless stops are voiced and geminated and the suffix Ø-a is added in the asematic

-t-dda
-k-gga
-ḳ-gva
– The voiceless stop -t in oblique cases is deleted and causes gpresent formpast form-isƛuv--esƛob-present formpast form-isƛuv--esƛob-present formpast form-isƛuv--esƛob-present formpast form-isƛuv--esƛob-present formpast form-iƛken--eƛkem-present formpast form-iƛken--eƛkem-present formpast form-iƛken--eƛkem-present formpast form-iƛken--eƛkem-present formpast form-elk-uƛ--elk-uƛ-present formpast form-elk-uƛ--elk-uƛ-present formpast form-elk-uƛ--elk-uƛ-present formpast form-elk-uƛ--elk-uƛ-emination of the suffix or becomes -dda
-t-vva/-dda

– Other consonants are geminated and the suffix Ø-a is added

-n-nna
-l-lla
-r-rra
-s-ssa
-ṡ-ṡṡa
-ts-ttsa

vowels

– Tense vowels are relaxed and the suffix Ø-va is added:

-i-eva
-u-ova
-a-ava, -oa
-y-ůvva

– Lax vowels remain lax and the suffix Ø-va is added:

-e-eva
-o-ova
-ůva

asematic plural

– If the asematic plural has -V-gi, the possessive suffix Ø-va is found before -gi:

-egi-evagi
-ogi-ovagi
-ůgi-ůvagi

– If the asematic plural has -C-ki or -C-gi, the possessive suffix Ø-va follows -ki/-gi

-kki-kkeva
-kvi-kveva
-lki-lkeva
-rki-rkeva
-ski-skeva
-ṡki-ṡkeva
-ḍki-ḍkeva
-ngi-ngeva

The first-person possessive prefix ṇ(i)- is commonly dropped in poetic and colloquial speech or a sign of respect. Certain things which are not understood to be possessable in Pine often trigger the absence of the prefix. For example, ṇipṃava ‘my wife’ is commonly found as ipṃava.

§4.6.2 Plural Local Possessive Affixes

The plural local possessive affixes are made up of the same prefixes as singular local possessives, either p(i)- for the second person and ṇ(i)- for the first person, and a local plural suffix. For the second person plural and the first person exclusive plural, the suffix is -on and the prefix is p(i)-, and for the first person inclusive plural, the plural suffix is -otṡin and the prefix is ṇ(i)-.

pi-Ø-on‘your (pl)’
pi-Ø-otṡin‘our (incl)’
ṇi-Ø-on‘our (excl)’

The plural possessive suffixes -on and -otṡin are found as -n/-tṡin after -o-/-ů-, but -un/-utṡin following -i-/-e-. Word-final voiceless stops (-t, -k, -) are vpresent formpast form-all--ol--at--od--an--on-present formpast form-all--ol--at--od--an--on-present formpast form-all--ol--at--od--an--on-present formpast form-all--ol--at--od--an--on-present formpast form-adn--ond--an--on--aƛƛ--oƛ-present formpast form-adn--ond--an--on--aƛƛ--oƛ-present formpast form-adn--ond--an--on--aƛƛ--oƛ-present formpast form-adn--ond--an--on--aƛƛ--oƛ-present formpast form-oan--ủn--ản--ủn--augg--ỏk-present formpast form-oan--ủn--ản--ủn--augg--ỏk-present formpast form-oan--ủn--ản--ủn--augg--ỏk-present formpast form-oan--ủn--ản--ủn--augg--ỏk-oiced but not geminated (-d-, -g-, -gv-) before local plural possessive suffixes. In nouns that have an asematic plural in -egi/-ogi/-ůgi, the local plural possessive suffix -on/-otṡin merges with the plural marker to form -engi/-ongi/-ůngi and -etṡingi/-otṡingi/-ůtṡingi respectively.

A summary of the rules that apply when adding the local possessive sufix -va is given below:

consonants

– Voiceless stops are voiced before the suffixes -on/-otṡin:

-t-don/-dotṡin
-k-gon/-gotṡin
-ḳ-gvon/-gvotṡin

– Other consonants are unaffected:

-n-non/-notṡin
-l-lon/-lotṡin
-r-ron/-rotṡin
-s-son/-sotṡin
-ṡ-ṡon/-ṡotṡin
-ts-tson/-tsotṡin
– Inessive singular and plural, comitative singular and illative plural case endings -Vt-on/-otṡin are reduced to -ỉn/-ỉtṡin, -ỷn/-ỷtṡin or -ủn/-ủtṡin:
-mut-mủn/-mủtṡin
-mit-mỉn/-mỉtṡin
-myt-mỷn/-mỷtṡin
-isit-isỉn/-isỉtṡin
-usut-usủn/-usủtṡin
-ysyt-ůsỷn/-ůsỷtṡin
-ittit-ittỉn/-ittỉtṡin
-uttut-uttủn/-uttủtṡin
-yttyt-yttỷn/-yttỷtṡin
-igut -igủn/-igủtṡin
-ikkut-ikkủn/-ikkủtṡin
-ugit-ugỉn/-ugỉtṡin
-ukkit-ukkỉn/-ukkỉtṡin
-ygit-ygỉn/-ygỉtṡin
-ykkit-ykkỉn/-ykkỉtṡin

vowels

– The plural possessive suffixes -on/-otṡin become -un/-utṡin after -i-/-e-:

-i-iun/-iutṡin
-e-iun/-iutṡin

– After other vowels, the plural possessive suffixes are -n/-tṡin:

-u-un/-utṡin
-o-on/-otṡin
-a-an/-atṡin
-y-yn/-ytṡin
-ůn/-ůtṡin

asematic plural

– If the asematic plural has -V-gi, -n-/-tṡin- precedes the plural marker:

-egi-engi/-etṡingi
-ogi-ongi/-otṡingi
-ůgi-ůngi/-ůtṡingi

– If the asematic plural has -C-ki or -C-gi, the plural possessive suffixes -un/-utṡin follows -ki/-gi:

-kki-kkiun/-kkiutṡin
-kvi-kviun/-kviutṡin
-lki-lkiun/-lkiutṡin
-rki-rkiun/-rkiutṡin
-ski-skiun/-skiutṡin
-ṡki-ṡkiun/-ṡkiutṡin
-ḍki-ḍkiun/-ḍkiutṡin
-ngi-ngiun/-ngiutṡin

Forms in -iun and -iutṡin also have alternative forms in -en and -etṡin, but these are more common in poetic language. They are also found in the words Niṡkullikketṡin ‘Pine language’ and Niṡkuvukketṡin ‘Pine land’.

§4.6.2.1 Local Nominal Possessive Declension: tsukṇi ‘knife’
tsukṇi ‘knife’2.sg1.sg2.pl1.pl.incl1.pl.excl
singular
asematicpitsukṇevaṇitsukṇevapitsukṇiunpitsukṇiutṡinṇitsukṇiun
sematicpitsuoġnevaṇitsuoġnevapitsuoġniunpitsuoġniutṡinṇitsuoġniun
inessivepitsuoġnimuddaṇitsuoġnimuddapitsuoġnimủnpitsuoġnimủtṡinṇitsuoġnimủn
illativepitsuoġneddaṇitsuoġneeddapitsuoġnedonpitsuoġnedotṡinṇituoġnedon
elativepitsuoġnỉnnaṇitsuoġnỉnnapitsuoġnỉnonpitsuoġnỉnotṡinṇitsuoġnỉnon
comitativepitsuoġniguddaṇitsuoġniguddapitsuoġnigủnpitsuoġnigủtṡinṇitsuoġnigủn
essivepitsukṇỉttsaṇitsukṇỉttsapitsukṇỉtsonpitsukṇỉtsotṡinṇituknnỉtson
plural
asematicpitsukṇevagiṇitsukṇevagipitsukṇengipitsukṇetṡingiṇitsukṇengi
sematicpitsuoġnuddaṇitsuoġnuddapitsuoġnudonpitsuoġnudotṡinṇitsuoġnudon
inessivepitsuoġnisiddaṇitsuoġnisiddapitsuoġnisỉnpitsuoġnisỉtṡinṇitsuoġnisỉn
illativepitsuoġnuttuddaṇitsuoġnuttuddapitsuoġnuttủnpitsuoġnuttủtṡinṇitsuoġnuttủn
elativepitsuoġningiddaṇitsuoġningiddapitsuoġningidonpitsuoġningidotṡinṇitsuoġningidon
comitativepitsuoġneinnaṇitsuoġneinnapitsuoġneinonpitsuoġneinotṡinṇitsuoġneinon
essivepitsukṇỉtseddaṇitsukṇỉtseddapitsukṇỉtsedonpitsukṇỉtsedotṡinṇitsukṇỉtsedon
§4.6.2.2 Local Nominal Possessive Declension: naukvis ‘dog’
naukvis ‘dog’2.sg1.sg2.pl1.pl.incl1.pl.excl
singular
asematicpinaukvissaṇinaukvissapinaukvisonpinaukvisotṡinṇinaukvison
sematicpinaukvavaṇinaukvavapinaukvanpinaukvatṡinṇinaukvan
inessivepinaukvumiddaṇinaukvumiddapinaukvumỉnpinaukvumỉtṡinṇinaukvumỉn
illativepinaukvoddaṇinaukvooddapinaukvodonpinaukvodotṡinṇinaukvodon
elativepinaukvủnnaṇinaukvủnnapinaukvủnonpinaukvủnotṡinṇinaukvủnon
comitativepinaukvissuddaṇinaukvissuddapinaukvissủnpinaukvissủtṡinṇinaukvissủn
essiveoinaukvittsaṇinaukvittsapinaukvittsanpinaukvittsatṡinṇinaukvittsan
plural
asematicpinaukviskevaṇinaukviskevapinaukviskiunpinaukviskiutṡinṇinaukviskiun
sematicpinaukvuvvaṇinaukvuvvapinaukvudonpinaukvudotṡinṇinaukvudon
inessivepinaukvusuddaṇinaukvusuddapinaukvusủnpinaukvusủtṡinṇinaukvusủn
illativepinaukvittiddaṇinaukvittiddapinaukvittỉnpinaukvittỉtṡinṇinaukvittỉn
elativepinaukvungiddaṇinaukvungiddapinaukvungidonpinaukvungidotṡinṇinaukvungidon
comitativepinaukvuinnaṇinaukvuinnapinaukvuinonpinaukvuinotṡinṇinaukvuinon
essivepinaukvittseddaṇinaukvitttseddapinaukvittsedonpinaukvittsedotṡinṇinaukvittsedon

§4.6.3 Non-Local Possessive Affixes

Nominal possessive declensions of non-local persons follows a similar pattern to that of local possessive declensions in that they highly resemble unagentive intransitive verbal affixes. While pronominal prefixes are not sensitive to number, the third-person obviate only exists in the singular. The third-person animate prefix is s(a)-, which unlike its corresponding verbal pronominal set is found as sa- before consonant clusters, whereas pronominal affixes for the third person inanimate only appear as s- before consonants that can combine into a word-initial cluster (sa·tsuḳnen 'her/his knife' but tsintus 's/he is thirsty' (not *sa·tsintus). The fourth-person prefix is m(i)-, the third-person inanimate is (h)- which also behaves like its corresponding verbal pronominal set, while the third-person obviate has s(a)-Ø-amin. The possessive suffixes are -an for the singular, with the third-person inanimate having -a(mi), while the possessive suffix is -at for the third animate and fourth person plural and -ảt or -oat for the third-person inanimate plural.

singularplural
3as(a)-Ø-an‘her/his’s(a)-Ø-at‘their’
4m(i)-Ø-an‘(some)one’sm(i)-Ø-at‘people’s’
3i(h)-Ø-ami‘its’(h)-Ø--ảt/-oat‘theirs’
3os(a)-Ø-amin‘her/his2

The vowel of singular possessive suffixes -an/-a(mi) is dropped after a vowel, and causes relaxation of the previous vowel, but the plural suffixes -at/-ảt/-oat retain their vowel after -i-/-e- (-iat), and after -u-/-o-, they combine to form -oat/-oat or -uat. In nouns that have an asematic plural in -egi/-ogi/-ůgi, the non-local singular possessive suffixes -an/-a(mi) merges with the plural marker to form -engi/-emigi, -ongi/-omigi and -ůngi/-ůmingi while the non-local plural suffixes -at/-ảt/-oat combine with the asematic plural markers to give -ekki, -okki and -ůkki.

As with local pronouns, the inessive and illative plural endings -VsVt and -VdVt are found without the final -t and a geminated vowel before markers in -(a)n and -(a)t.

A summary of the rules that apply when adding the non-local possessive sufixes is given below:

consonants

– Voiceless stops are voiced before the suffixes -a(mi)/-at/-ảt/-oat:

-t-da(mi)/-dat~-dảt~-doat
-k-ga(mi)/-gat~-gảt~-goat
-ḳ-gva(mi)/-gvat~-gvảt~-gvoat

– Other consonants are unaffected:

-n-na(mi)/-nat~-nảt~-noat
-l-la(mi)/-lat~-lảt~-loat
-r-ra(mi)/-rat~-rảt~-roat
-s-sa(mi)/-sat~-sảt~-soat
-ṡ-ṡa(mi)/-ṡat~-ṡảt~-ṡoat
-ts-tsa(mi)/-tsat~-tsảt~-tsoat

– Inessive and illative plural case endings -Vt-a(mi)/-at/-oat/-ảt are reduced to -ỉn/-ỉt(a), -ỷn/-ỷt(a) or -ủn/-ủt:

-isit-isỉn/-isỉt
-usut-usủn/-usủt
-ysyt-ůsỷn/-ůsỷt
-ittit-ittỉn/-ittỉt
-uttut-uttủn/-uttủt
-yttyt-yttỷn/-yttỷt

vowels

– The plural possessive suffixes -at/-ảt/-oat become -oat/-uat after -u-/-o-:

-u-oat/-uat
-o-oat/-uat

– After -e-/-i-, the plural possessive suffixes combine to give -iat:

-i-iat
-e-iat

– After -ia-, the plural possessive suffixes combine to give -iut:

-ia-iut

– After other vowels, the plural possessive suffixes are -n/-tṡin:

-u-un/-utṡin
-o-on/-otṡin
-a-an/-atṡin
-y-yn/-ytṡin
-ůn/-ůtṡin

asematic plural

– If the asematic plural has -V-gi, the non-local singular -n-/-mi- precede the plural marker:
-egi-engi/-emigi
-ogi-ongi/-omigi
-ůgi-ůngi/-ůmingi

– If the asematic plural has -V-gi, the plural suffix -t- gives -kki and -ta- gives -kkita:

-egi-ekki/-ekkita
-ogi-okki/-okkita
-ůgi-ůkki/-ůkkita

– In other cases, the non-local suffixes follow the plural marker.

§4.6.3.1 Non-Local Nominal Possessive Declension: bakvi ‘home’
bakvi ‘house’3a.sg4.sg3i.sg3o3a.pl4.pl3i.pl
singular
asematicspakvenmibakvenbakvemispakveminspakviatmibakviatbakviat
sematicspoagvenmiboagvenboagvemispoagveminspoagviatmiboagviatboagviat
inessivespoagvimủnmiboagvimủnboagvimủnspoagvimủminspoagvimủtmiboagvimủtboagvimủt
illativespoagvedanmiboagvedanboagvedamispoagvedaminspoagvedatmiboagvedatboagvedoat
elativespoagvỉnanmiboagvỉnanboagvỉnamispoagvỉnaminspoagvỉnatmiboagvỉnatboagvỉnoat
comitativespoagvigủnmioagvigủnboagvigủnspoagvigủminspoagvigủtmiboagvigủtboagvigủt
essivespakvỉtsanmibakvỉtsanbakvỉtsamispakvỉtsaminspakvỉtsatmibakvỉtsatbakvỉtsoat
plural
asematicspakvengimibakvengibakvemigispakvemingispakvekkimibakvekkibakvekki
sematicspoagvudanmiboagvudanboagvudamispoagvudaminspoagvudatmiboagvudatboagvudoat
inessivespoagvisỉnmiboagvisỉnboagvisỉnspoagvisỉminspoagvisỉtmiboagvisỉtboagvisỉt
illativespoagvuttủnmiboagvuttủnboagvuttutủnspoagvuttủminspoagvuttủtmiboagvuttủtboagvuttủt
elativespoagvingidanmiboagvingidanboagvingidamispoagvingidaminspoagvingidatmiboagvingidatboagvingidoat
comitativespoagveinanmiboagveinanboagveinamispoagveinaminspoagveinatmiboagveinatboagveinoat
essivespakvỉtsedanmibakvỉtsedanbakvỉtsedamispakvỉtsedaminspakvỉtsedatmibakvỉtsedatbakvỉtsedoat
§4.6.3.2 Non-Local Nominal Possessive Declension: ḷinkkas ‘boat’
ḷinkkas ‘boat’3a.sg4.sg3i.sg3o3a.pl4.pl3i.pl
singular
asematicsƛinkkasanmiḷinkkasanḷinkkasamisƛinkkasaminsƛinkkasatmiḷinkkasatḷinkkasoat
sematicsƛinkkanmiḷinkkanḷinkkamisƛinkkaminsƛinkkatmiḷinkkatḷinkkoat
inessivesƛinkkimủnmiḷinkkimủnḷinkkimủnsƛinkkimủminsƛinkkimủtmiḷinkkimủtḷinkkimủt
illativesƛinkkedanmiḷinkkedanḷinkkedamisƛinkkedaminsƛinkkedatmiḷinkkedatḷinkkedoat
elativesƛinkkỉnanmiḷinkkỉnanḷinkkỉnamisƛinkkỉnaminsƛinkkỉnatmiḷinkkỉnatḷinkkỉnoat
comitativesƛinkkussỉnmiḷinkkussỉnḷinkkvussỉnsƛinkkussỉminsƛinkkussỉtmiḷinkkussỉtḷinkkussỉt
essivesƛinkkatsanmiḷinkkasanḷinkkatsamisƛinkkatsaminsƛinkkatsatmiḷinkkasatḷinkkatsoat
plural
asematicsƛinkkaskenmiḷinkkaskenḷinkkaskemisƛinkkaskeminsƛinkkaskiatmiḷinkkaskiatḷinkkaskiat
sematicsƛinkkidanmiḷinkkidanḷinkkidamisƛinkkidaminsƛinkkidatmiḷinkkidatḷinkkidoat
inessivesƛinkkisỉnmiḷinkkisỉnḷinkkisỉnsƛinkkisỉminsƛinkkisỉtmiḷinkkisỉtḷinkkisỉt
illativesƛinkkuttủnmiḷinkkuttủnḷinkkuttủnsƛinkkuttủminsƛinkkuttủtmiḷinkkuttủtḷinkkuttủt
elativesƛinkkingidanmiḷinkkingidanḷinkkingidamisƛinkkingidaminsƛinkkingidatmiḷinkkingidatḷinkkingidoat
comitativesƛinkkeinanmiḷinkkeinanḷinkkeinamisƛinkkeinaminsƛinkkeinatmiḷinkkeinatḷinkkeinoat
essivesƛinkkattsodanmiḷinkkattsodanḷinkkattsodamisƛinkkattsodaminsƛinkkattsodatmiḷinkkattsodatḷinkkattsodoat

§4.6.4 Obligate Possessive Nouns

A small number of nouns are obligate possessive nouns, meaning they cannot appear without possessive affixes. They are related to kinship or unalienable or abstract possessions and are irregular in their declension. When there is no clear possessor, the kinship stems have two forms, one with the form (s)-Ø-(a)(mi)n, that is with a third-person obviate possessor, and one non-local possessor without any possessive prefix: Ø-(a)n: -ikka(ġa)- ‘Ø’s father’ ⟫ sikkaġamin~ikkaġa(mi)n ‘(a/the) father’ and -umma(ġa)- ‘mother’ ⟫ summaġa(mi)n~ummaġa(mi)n ‘(a/the) mother’. If one is talking about their own father, then one would say ṇikkava ‘my father’ or sikkaġan ‘her/his father’ or sikkakki ‘their fathers’, and likewise ṇummava ‘my mother’ and summaġan ‘his/her mother’ or summakki ‘their mothers’. Note that both father and mother have alternative familiar forms: igga ‘father, dad’, and ummi ‘mother, mum’, which often only have possessive suffixes: iggava ‘my dad’ and ummiva ‘my mum’. Note -ikka- ‘father’ and -umma- ‘mother’ (and their sematic forms in -ỉka- and -ủma-) appear as -ikka-ġa- or -ikka-va- and -umma-ġa- or -ummu-va- in the with non-local possessive suffixes, which assimilates with the inessive singular ending to form -ikka-mmut- and -umma-mmut- respectively. There also exist back-aligned forms for father (-ikku-/-ikku-ġa-) and mother (-ummu-/-ummu-ġa-), where the possessive suffixes do not cause relaxation of -u- to -o- as would be expected in any other case. Back-aligned forms are often considered more endearing and should only ever be used when it is clear that the context allows it.

Unlike other nouns, obligate possessive nouns can occur with a genitive head noun but must still be in the possessive, for example mỉntto sikkaġan ‘the girl’s father’ (lit. the girl’s her father). Obligate possessive nouns include:

asematicsematic
Ø-ikka(ġa)-Ø-Ø-ỉka(ġa)‘father’
Ø-umma-(ġa)-Ø-ủma(ġa)‘mother’
Ø-iṡk(i)Ø-iṡka‘self’ (local only)
Ø-iṡk(i)Ø-ỉttṡu‘self’ (non-local only)
Ø-gem(i)Ø-geibma‘mind, opinion’
Ø-iṡk(i)Ø-ỉttṡu‘own, very own’
Ø-ilįiØ-ỉllįa‘(autobiographical) life’
Ø-bem(i)Ø-bima‘home (one’s own)’
Ø-ogakvØ-oġv‘home (someone else’s)’

The English word ‘self’ has one form used exclusively with the second and first person, Ø-iṡk(i)-Ø ⟫ Ø-iṡka-Ø, and one for non-local persons, Ø-iṡk(i)-Ø ⟫ Ø-ỉttṡu-Ø, such that ‘myself’ is ṇiṡkava but ‘herself/himself’ is sỉttṡon. Note that when iṡk(i)- is used to mean ‘one’s (very) own’, the possessive affixes are commonly found on the noun instead, which is found in the genitive. With possessor raising, no affixes may be found at all:

na tsesiḷḷummets ke piboalpṃudda iṡka?‘did you make your own shoes?’
na siḷḷummas ke spoalpṃudan ỉttṡu?‘did s/he make her/his own shoes?’

Obligate possessive nouns are declined like back-aligning consonantal nouns. For example, ‘at my home’ is ṇibimiava and ‘at her/his home’ is spimian. Note that Ø-bem(i)-Ø is more commonly found without a prefix, such that ‘to my home’ is more commonly heard as bimevva, and ‘to her/his home’ as bimedan. Below is the declension of Ø-ikka-Ø ‘father’ and Ø-umma-Ø ‘mother’ in the first-person singular possessive form:

ṇikkava ṇỉkavasingularplural

‘my father’

asematicṇikkavaṇikkavagi
sematicṇỉkavaṇỉkidda
inessiveṇỉkamuddaṇỉkisidda
illativeṇỉkeddaṇỉkuttudda
elativeṇỉkỉnnaṇỉkingidda
comitativeṇỉkiguddaṇỉkeinna
essiveṇikkảttsaṇikkảttsedda
ṇikkuva ṇỉkuvasingularplural

‘my dad’

asematicṇikkuvaṇikkuvagi
sematicṇỉkuvaṇỉkidda
inessiveṇỉkumiddaṇỉkusudda
illativeṇỉkoddaṇỉkittidda
elativeṇỉkủnnaṇỉkungidda
comitativeṇỉkugiddaṇỉkuinna
essiveṇikkủttsaṇikkủttsodda
ṇummava ṇủmava singularplural

‘my mother’

asematicṇummavaṇummavagi
sematicṇủmavaṇủmidda
inessiveṇủmamuddaṇủmisidda
illativeṇủmeddaṇủmuttudda
elativeṇủmỉnnaṇủmingidda
comitativeṇủmiguddaṇủmeinna
essiveṇummoattsaṇummoattsodda
ṇummuva ṇủmuva singularplural

‘my mum’

asematicṇummuvaṇummuvagi
sematicṇủmuvaṇủmidda
inessiveṇủmumiddaṇủmusudda
illativeṇủmoddaṇủmittidda
elativeṇủmủnnaṇủmungidda
comitativeṇủmugiddaṇủmuinna
essiveṇummủttsaṇummủttsodda
ikkaġan ỉkaġan singularplural

‘a/the father’

asematicikkaġanikkaġakki
sematicỉkaġanỉkaġidat
inessiveỉkammudanỉkaġisỉt
illativeỉkaġedanỉkaġuttủt
elativeỉkaġỉnanỉkaġingidat
comitativeỉkaġigủnỉkaġeinat
essiveikkaġảtsanikkaġảttsedat
ummaġan ủmaġan singularplural

‘a/the mother’

asematicummaġanummaġakki
sematicủmaġanủmaġidat
inessiveủmammudanủmaġisỉt
illativeủmaġedanủmaġuttủt
elativeủmaġỉnanủmaġingidat
comitativeủmaġigủnủmaġeinat
essiveummaġoatsanummaġoattsodat

Because the declension of ‘self’ is unusual in that it has a specific local and non-local form, it is given in its entirety below. There exists a special form of the local pronoun -ṡk- with a fourth-person obviate prefix but a local suffix, mi-ṡk-va, which is used to convey an indirect or politely unspecified clusivity or generally local actor, unspecified but assumed to be ‘you’ or ‘we’, somewhere between ‘one’, ‘you’ and ‘we’ in English, for example miḷủladdan mỉttṡukkỉn ‘one is talking to oneself, we are talking to ourselves, you are talking to yourself’. In this role, aṡkva is often used independently much like a pronoun, for example na gegaṃiḍkututton ke įi miṡkava ‘might someone (you, me) be drunk?’.

§4.6.4.1 Local Possessive Declension of ‘self’
Ø-iṡk-Ø ‘self’2.sg1.sg2.pl1.pl.incl1.pl.excl
singularplural
asematicpiṡkvaṇiskvapiṡkengipiṡketṡingiṇiṡkengi
sematicpiṡkavaṇiskavapiṡkudonpiṡkudotṡinṇiṡkudon
inessivepiṡkimuddaṇiskimuvva
ṇiṡkimudda
piṡkisỉnpiṡkisỉtṡinṇiṡkisỉn
illativepiṡkeddaṇiṡkevva
ṇiṡkedda
piṡkuttủnpiṡkuttủtṡinṇiṡkuttủn
elativepiṡkỉnnaṇiṡkỉnnapỉṡkingidonpỉṡkingidotṡinṇiṡkingidon
comitativepiṡkiguddaṇiṡkiguddapiṡkeinonpiṡkeinotṡinṇiṡkeinon
essivepiskỉttsaṇiskỉttsapiṡkỉtsedonpiṡkỉtsedotṡinṇiṡkỉtsedon
§4.6.4.2 Non-Local Possessive Declension of ‘self’
Ø-iṡk-Ø ‘self’3a.sg4.sg3i.sg3o3a.pl4.pl3i.pl
singularplural
asematicsiṡkenmiṡkanhiṡkamisiṡkeminsiṡkekkimiṡkekkihiṡkekki(a)
sematicsỉttṡonmỉttṡonhỉttṡumisỉttṡominsỉttṡudatmỉttṡudathỉttṡudoat
inessivesỉttṡummỉnmỉttṡummmỉnhỉttṡummỉnsỉttṡummỉminsỉttṡusủtmỉttṡusủthỉttṡusủta
illativesỉttṡodanmỉttṡodanhỉttṡodamisỉttṡodaminsỉttṡittỉtmỉttṡittỉthỉttṡittỉta
elativesỉttṡủnanmỉttṡủnanhỉttṡủnamisỉttṡủnaminsỉttṡungidatmỉttṡungidathỉttṡungidoat
comitativesỉttṡukkỉnmỉttṡukkỉnhỉttṡukkỉnsỉttṡukkỉminsỉttṡuinatmỉttṡuinathỉttṡuinoat
essivesiṡkỉtsanmiṡkỉtsanhiṡkỉtsansiṡkỉtsaminsiṡkỉtsatmiṡkỉtsathiṡkỉtsảt

§4.7 Names

Pine nominal declensions also include names, whether of people or places. Proper names in Pine have their own rules as to how they are formed and combined. Likewise, toponyms are formed in ways that may differ from normal nominals.

§4.7.1 Proper Names

Traditional Pine first names are either a single word or two words combined together. The combination of words is often due to the combination of parts of the names of the grandparents. Surnames are not part of traditional Pine names – instead, a person is either identified by a place where they come from or live, or a chain of other proper names identifying the person’s parents, grandparents and even great grandparents, and often include other qualifiers.

§4.7.1.1 First Names

The most common first names are given below with their literal meaning. Many Pine names are descriptives of the natural world or derived from them. Pine Names may or may not be gendered. Male names tend to end in -u, -uḳ -ut, -uts, -in, -is, -ir -a or -ak, while female names tend to end in -a, -ak, -as, -i, -is, -its, -en, or -el.

Names can either be simple, made up of a single word, or can be made up of two names combined (combined names). Simple names can also be found with prefixes which cannot stand on their own, in which case they are called compound names.

The 10 most common names for men and women are given below.

menwomen
1.AlguỈkakỉ
2.MiginDalda
3.DalgotAḍḍa
4.NiḷḷįutĮaįįỏmi
5.UįįunIlppa
6.(Ảįy)kengirTủli
7.KoḍmutLalda
8.EįįakỦlủn
9.KunnaKỉgassi
10.Anƛƛa, AnƛƛurSivi
§4.7.1.1.1 Simple Names

Simple names are usually derived from nouns or adjectives or may not be derived at all.

§4.7.1.1.1.1 Male Simple Names
(1)Aįįin‘clear’
Aįįak‘clear’
Aįįut‘clear’
Algu‘gift’
Algut‘gift’
Algits‘gift’
Alkin‘giver’
Anƛƛa‘lasso’
Anƛƛur‘lasso’
Asƛut‘pure’
Ảįin‘clear’
Ảįak‘clear’
Ảįyt‘clear’
Baggut‘home’
Bakvut‘home’
Bikti‘sturgeon’
Biktsut‘sturgeon’
Bikkut‘sturgeon’
Bįelgut‘trusted’
Bįelkkun‘trusted’
Bįelguḳ‘trusted’
Dalgot‘glowing’
Eḍku‘spear’
Eḍkut‘spear’
Eįįuḳ‘scarred’
Eįįut‘scarred’
Gaḍḍut‘worthy’
Genda‘tall’
Goahit‘worthy’
Guḍkut‘pupil’
Guottsal‘pupil’
Guottsi‘pupil’
Ġvenit‘wind’
Ġvenut‘wind’
Ġvidnin‘wind’
Hartṇit‘feather’
Hartṇun‘feather’
Hỉnak‘still weather’
Hỉnut‘still weather’
Hiṡṡin‘hair, with hair’
Hįiƛƛin‘remembers’
Hįiƛƛuḳ‘remembered’
Hįiƛka‘memory’
Hįisƛu‘memory’
Hoaḍḍut‘sky’
Hoahha‘sky’
Hoahhut‘sky’
Hoarru‘tail feathers’
Huḍḍin‘light’
Huḍḍut‘light’
Huḍna‘light’
Humut‘dark’
Hubmun‘dark’
Hunkkit‘dark’
Iġġin‘running’
Ikṇut‘eagle’
Irin‘bark’
Irrut‘bark’
Irruḳ‘bark’
Irut‘bark’
Irtta‘bark’
Itta‘thank’
Iddun‘thank’
Ittuts‘thank’
Ỉįįa‘sap’
Ỉįįak‘sap’
Ỉįįin‘sap’
Ỉįįir‘sap’
Ỉįu‘sap’
Ỉįuḳ‘sap’
Ỉr‘arrow’
Ỉrtsa‘arrow’
Ỉruḳ‘arrow’
Ỉrut‘arrow’
Katvin‘rowan tree’
Katvut‘rowan tree’
Kaikkyt‘careful’
Kaukin‘striker’
Kaukka‘striker’
Keggin‘day’
Kekvut‘day’
Kengir‘day’
Kengu‘day’
Kikkut‘bone’
Kikta‘bone’
Kiktis‘bone’
Kirįin‘high tide’
Kįasƛun‘quick’
Kįasƛa‘quick’
Koḍḍun‘visitor’
Koḍdįut‘visitor’
Koḍmin‘visitor’
Koḍmut‘visitor’
Kuḍḍuḳ‘bear cub’
Kuḍku‘bear cub’
Kuḍkut‘bear cub’
Kukkut‘charred’
Kukta‘charred’
Kuktis‘charred’
Kuktu‘charred’
Kunna‘oak’
Kunnits‘oak’
Kunnuḳ‘oak’
Kvaubmis‘bear’
Kvaummuts‘bear’
Kvolkut‘cloud’
Kvoḷḷa‘cloud’
Kvoḷḷis‘cloud’
Kvoḷḷu‘cloud’
Kvoḷḷun‘cloud’
Lidnut‘speaks’
Linnin‘speaks’
Linkkis‘speaks’
Linkkut‘speaks’
Lįoallin‘low tide’
Lįủkkut‘common loon’
Lįuvvin‘common loon’
Lįuvvuḳ‘common loon’
Lįuvvut‘common loon’
Luoknu‘spruce tips’
Luoknut‘spruce tips’
Ḷįảpṇin‘crest’
Ḷįảpṇyt‘crest’
Ḷuįįin‘wading’
Ḷuįįir‘wading’
Ƛalla‘tall’
Ƛalgu‘tall’
Ƛalgut‘tall’
Ƛalgits‘tall’
Ƛipṇut‘freckled’
Maihhin‘maple’
Maihhįin‘maple’
Maihhyt‘maple’
Mauƛin‘sap’
Mauƛƛu‘sap’
Mauƛƛut‘sap’
Middu‘knowledge’
Middut‘knowledge’
Middits‘knowledge’
Midnut‘knowing’
Mieṡkin‘flame’
Mieṡkut‘flame’
Migin‘true’
Migut‘true’
Mỉgỉn‘first’
Mỉdni‘first’
Mỉṡkiḳ‘flame’
Mỉṡkuḳ‘flame’
Mỉtiḳ‘knowledge’
Ṃįaktsin‘bear’
Ṃįaktsut‘bear’
Ṃįaskin‘bear’
Ṃįaskut‘bear’
Niḷḷįa‘silver birch’
Niḷḷįis‘silver birch’
Niḷḷįu‘silver birch’
Niḷḷįut‘silver birch’
Nįella‘chief’
Nįellis‘chief’
Nįellut‘chief’
Nįilka‘cone’
Nįilkis‘cone’
Nįilkut‘cone’
Nįuġġin‘bow’
Nįuġġut‘bow’
Ṇįippu‘tar’
Ṇįippuḳ‘tar’
Ṇupṃin‘water’
Oįįak‘dwarf birch’
Oįįil‘dwarf bich’
Oįįir‘dwarf birch’
Oįįun‘dwarf birch’
Palġa‘maker’
Palġin‘maker’
Pilġu‘copper’
Pilġuts‘copper’
Piṡvin‘lynx’
Piṡvuts‘lynx’
Piuįįut‘snow’
Piuġġur‘snow’
Raykvin‘strong’
Raykvyt‘strong’
Ruoḍḍin‘burner’
Ruḍḍuḳ‘burnt’
Ṛiḍḍįut‘sharp’
Ṛilgu‘shining’
Ṛilgun‘shining’
Ṛilgut‘shining’
Sarġin‘straight, proud’
Sarġġut‘straight, proud’
Sevvin‘river’
Sisku‘thunder’
Siskits‘thunder’
Skaįi‘clear water’
Skaįįut‘clear water’
Snįỉriḳ‘spark’
Sṇįỉrut‘spark’
Sṇįỉrra‘spark’
Stullįin‘dares’
Stullįun‘dares’
Ṡaįįa‘ready’
Taġġin‘notices’
Taġġun‘notices’
Tahhin‘tracks’
Tahut‘tracks’
Taƛƛamit‘skull’
Taƛƛun‘skull’
Tannin‘stands’
Tannut‘stands’
Tapṃa‘large river’
Tingut‘power’
Toįįut‘rock’
Tỏ‘rock’
Tủli‘thinks’
Tủluḳ‘thought’
Tủlun‘thinks’
Tsarġġin‘energy’
Tsarġġut‘energy’
Tsuklin‘fire’
Tsukƛa‘fire’
Tsukƛut‘fire’
Tsukkul‘fire’
Uįįak‘endures’
Uįįit‘endures’
Uįįun‘endures’
Uįįir‘endures’
Unttsin‘dances’
Ủn‘geothermal creek’
Ủniḳ‘geothermal creek’
Ủnut‘geothermal creek’
Vaihut‘air’
Vuovvit‘hiding’
Vuovvir‘hiding’
Vuovvuḳ‘hidden’
Vuovvut‘hiding’
Yįįi‘spike’
Yįįir‘spike’
§4.7.1.1.1.2 Female Simple Names
(2)Aḍḍa‘salt’
Aiddi‘advises’
Aitvi‘advises’
Aiṡṡi‘(small) chest’
Aivi‘clear’
Aiven‘clear’
Akƛis‘seed’
Akno‘helps’
Algo‘gift’
Alget‘gift’
Algits‘gift’
Alken‘giver’
Angil‘seed’
Asƛa‘pure’
Asƛat‘pure’
Ảmi‘blood’
Bakvi‘home’
Balma‘warm’
Bekna‘freckle’
Beuha‘nice’
Billįen‘berry’
Boġġi‘branch’
Dalda‘sun’
Daldi‘sun’
Dalgi‘glowing’
Dallat‘sun’
Daḷḷa‘healthy’
Dvoaƛƛi‘bright-red’
Dyry‘female elk’
Elvi‘grows’
Ẻḥḥo‘fertile’
Ẻḥḥi‘fertile’
Ẻḥvi‘fertile’
Gaḍḍat‘worthy’
Gaiḍḍi‘curious’
Gaksi‘moon’
Gassi‘moon’
Gassen‘moon’
Genda‘tall’
Gindvi‘understands’
Gidda‘understands’
Giggir‘wolf’
Giski‘wolf’
Guḍki‘pupil’
Guottsel‘pupil’
Gvỏka‘warm weather’
Ġoḍḍi‘pale’
Ġvaƛƛi‘rainbow’
Haƛna‘sea ice’
Hartta‘crown’
Haudda‘morning’
Hey‘night’
Hỉnak‘still weather’
Hiḷḷįat‘common loon’
Hiṡṡa‘hair, with hair’
Hįiƛƛi‘remembers’
Hįiƛƛuḳ‘remembered’
Hįiƛka‘memory’
Hįisƛi‘memory’
Hoaḍḍi‘sky’
Hoahha‘sky’
Hoahhat‘sky’
Hoarri‘tail feathers’
Huḍḍi‘light’
Huḍḍat‘light’
Huḍna‘light’
Huma‘dark’
Hubmi‘dark’
Hylli‘holy’
Ibat‘wife’
Ibbas‘wife’
Iddi‘thank’
Iḍnįa‘shape’
Ikṇi‘eagle’
Ilįa‘life’
Ilįen‘life’
Illįi‘life’
Ilbi‘flower’
Ilppa‘flower’
Ilppen‘flower’
Iƛƛa‘beautiful’
Iƛvi‘beautiful’
Iƛƛen‘beautiful’
Iri‘bark’
Irpṃen‘sunray’
Irra‘bark’
Irruḳ‘bark’
Irat‘bark’
Irtta‘bark’
Itta‘thank’
Ittits‘thank’
Ỉįįa‘sap’
Ỉįįak‘sap’
Ỉįįi‘sap’
Ỉįįel‘sap’
Ỉįat‘sap’
Ỉįuḳ‘sap’
Ỉka‘energy’
Ỉr‘arrow’
Ỉrtsa‘arrow’
Ỉruḳ‘arrow’
Ỉras‘arrow’
Įyllyt‘fresh’
Katvi‘rowan tree’
Katva‘rowan tree’
Kaikkas‘careful’
Kekka‘west’
Keggi‘day’
Keknas‘day’
Kelga‘river bend’
Kengel‘day’
Kigga‘forest’
Kỉ‘new’
Kỉįįa‘new’
Kỉįįak‘new’
Kỉka‘forest’
Kỉken‘forest’
Kiḷḷįa‘heel, short’
Kiḷḷįas‘heel, short’
Kirįas‘high tide’
Kįaiƛƛa‘fern’
Kukka‘charred’
Kukta‘charred’
Kukten‘charred’
Kukta‘charred’
Kulbi‘poppy’
Kulpa‘poppy’
Kunna‘oak’
Kunnits‘oak’
Kunnuḳ‘oak’
Kvolga‘cloud’
Kvoḷḷa‘cloud’
Laiki‘breeze’
Lalda‘glows’
Lalden‘glows’
Lallat‘grows’
Lidna‘speaks’
Linni‘speaks’
Linkkas‘speaks’
Linkka‘speaks’
Lįoalli‘low tide’
Lįủkka‘common loon’
Lįuvvi‘common loon’
Lỏla‘east’
Luokni‘spruce tips’
Luokna‘spruce tips’
Ḷįảpṇi‘crest’
Ḷuįįi‘wading’
Ḷuįįel‘wading’
Ƛipṇut‘freckled’
Ƛisƛa‘sings’
Ƛisƛen‘sings’
Ƛủka‘stock dove’
Ƛỷmi‘well-fed’
Maihhi‘maple’
Maihhįi‘maple’
Mauƛi‘sap’
Mauƛƛa‘sap’
Mauƛƛas‘sap’
Meḍka‘mends’
Meiska‘sprout’
Middi‘knowledge’
Middat‘knowledge’
Middits‘knowledge’
Midna‘knowing’
Mieṡki‘flame’
Mieṡka‘flame’
Migi‘true’
Migat‘true’
Mỉṡkiḳ‘flame’
Mỉṡkuḳ‘flame’
Mỉtiḳ‘knowledge’
Minda‘girl’
Ṃairga‘laughs’
Ṃairri‘laughs’
Ṃuįįa‘warm’
Ṃủįa‘warm’
Niḍḍat‘new snow’
Niḍġi‘new snow’
Nỉƛa‘face’
Nỉƛƛa‘face’
Nỉƛven‘face’
Nỉƛvi‘face’
Niḷḷįa‘silver birch’
Niḷḷįas‘silver birch’
Nįalba‘cone’
Nįalbur‘cone’
Nįalpi‘cone’
Nįilka‘cone’
Nįilkat‘cone’
Nįiski‘ski’
Nįuġġi‘bow’
Nůdna‘wave’
Ṇįippa‘tar’
Ṇįippuḳ‘tar’
Ṇupṃi‘water’
Oįįak‘dwarf birch’
Oįįel‘dwarf bich’
Oįįa‘dwarf birch’
Opṃa‘snow’
Ỏġġen‘ancient’
Ỏmi‘snow’
Pỉdnįa‘fall colours’
Pỉƛƛa‘red’
Pỉva‘sneaks’
Pilġi‘copper’
Pilġat‘copper’
Piski‘listens’
Piṡvi‘lynx’
Piṡvat‘lynx’
Pittṡa‘crow’
Piuįįa‘snow’
Piuġġa‘snow’
Puiįįa‘picks’
Puįįa‘picks’
Pyssy‘dunlin’
Raġġa‘talkative’
Ruoḍḍi‘burner’
Ruḍḍuḳ‘burnt’
Ṛiḍḍįa‘sharp’
Ṛilga‘shining’
Ṛilgen‘shining’
Ṛilgat‘shining’
Ṛirka‘raven’
Ṛirḳi‘raven’
Ṛiṛṛa‘raven’
Saḷḷa‘perfume’
Saḍna‘shade’
Siḷḷįel‘female’
Sarġi‘straight, proud’
Sarġġas‘straight, proud’
Sevvi‘river’
Siska‘thunder’
Siskits‘thunder’
Sitvi‘intelligent’
Sivi‘river’
Skaįi‘clear water’
Skaįįa‘clear water’
Skigga‘buttercup’
Skiggel‘buttercup’
Skỉka‘buttercup’
Sṇana‘flower’
Spekna‘freckles’
Ṡaįįa‘ready’
Ṡina‘lake’
Ṡkirki‘siskin’
Taġġi‘notices’
Taġġat‘notices’
Tammel‘ocean’
Tapṃa‘large river’
Tattsa‘fog’
Tattsen‘fog’
Telmi‘dusk’
Telpṃa‘dusk’
Tepṃa‘stream’
Tikna‘power’
Tirįa‘sinew’
Tủli‘thinks’
Tủlas‘thinks’
Tsarġġi‘energy’
Tsarġġas‘energy’
Tselga‘young woman’
Tselgen‘young woman’
Tsikva‘bright, white’
Tsirta‘cheerful’
Tsittsa‘cheerful’
Tsukli‘fire’
Tsukƛa‘fire’
Tsukkel‘fire’
Tṡaiḍḍi‘mist’
Tṡaihi‘mist’
Tṡaiha‘mist’
Tṡeva‘cold’
Tṡilla‘island’
Tṡilvi‘island’
Tṡuohen‘black and white’
Tṡuohi‘black and white’
Tṡủhi‘black and white’
Tṡvaiḍḍi‘mist’
Uįįak‘endures’
Uįįi‘endures’
Uįįas‘endures’
Uįįel‘endures’
Ulba‘round’
Ullut‘round’
Ulppi‘round’
Unttsi‘dances’
Uṛṛa‘mist’
Uvva‘bumblebee’
Ủa‘pretty, bumblebee’
Ủdna‘geothermal creek’
Ủn‘geothermal creek’
Vabna‘smoke’
Vaƛƛa‘snowstorm’
Vaƛma‘snowstorm’
Vaihi‘air’
Vaiha‘air’
Veivi‘bird’
Veivva‘bird’
Vỉva‘bird’
Vilvi‘bird’
Vivva‘bird’
Vovi‘ghost’
Vulma‘leaf’
Vulla‘leaf
Vuovva‘hiding’
Vuovvel‘hiding’
Vuovvi‘hiding’
Yįįi‘spike’
Yįįir‘spike’
Yrġġa‘bud’
Yvvi‘ice’
‘ice’
Ỷva‘ice’
§4.7.1.1.2 Combined Names

Combined names are made up of two simple names. They can be combined in various combinations. Common examples are given below.

§4.7.1.1.2.1 Male Combined Simple Names

Some of the most common initial combined simple names end in -u, -ir, or -a. Names ending in -t lose the -t in combined simple names before a consonant. Some of the most common names are: Aįįut-, Algo-, Anƛƛa-, Asƛut-, Ảįyt- Bįelgut-, Dalgot-, Eįįut-, Ġvenit-, Hỉnut-, Huḍḍut-, Humut-, Ikṇut-, Irut-, Itta-, Ỉįįa-, Ỉr-, Kaukka-, Kikta-, Kukkut-, Kuktu-, Ƛalgut-, Middut-, Migut-, Niḷḷįut-, Nįuġġut-, Oįįir-, Pilġu-, Ṛilgut-, Sisku-, Tahut-, Tỏ-, Toįįut-, Uįįir-, Ủn-, Vaihyt-, Vuovvut- and Yįįir-. Some of the most common second combined names are: -dalgot, -ikṇut, -kaikkyt, -kaukin, -kengir, -koḍmut, -kunna, -mieṡkin, -migin, -pilġu, -sisku, -tingut, -tủli, -vaihyt and -vuovvut

Aįįuvuovvut

Algokunna

Algosisku

Anƛƛakengir

Anƛƛadalgot

Asƛuvaihyt

Ảįykengir

Bįelguskaįįut

Dalgokunna

Ġvenitapṃa

Hỉnuvaihyt

Humuṃįaskin

Ikṇuġvenit

Iruḷįảpṇyt

Ittakoḍmut

Ỉįįapilġu

Ỉrƛalla

Ỉrġvenit

Kaukkatingut

Kiktasisku

Kukkudalgot

Kuktugaḍḍut

Ƛalguteįįuḳ

Middukaukin

Migukunna

Nįiḷḷukvoḷḷa

Nįuġġumigin

Oįįirkaikkyt

Pilġumieṡkin

Ṛilgumigin

Siskutủli

Tahuvaihyt

Tỏtaġġun

Tỏmigin

Toįįumaihhįi

Uįįirmigin

Ủnkikta

Vaihymigin

Vuovvukunna

Yįįirtahut

§4.7.1.1.2.2 Female Combined Simple Names

As with masculine combined simple names, those ending in -t lose the -t in combined simple names before a consonant. Some of the most common names are: Aḍḍa-, Aivi-, Asƛat-, Ảmi-, Balma- Dalda-, Ẻḥḥi-, Gaksi-, Gassi-, Haudda-, Hey-, Hįiƛƛi-, Hoahha-, Huma-, Iddi-, Ilįa-, Ilppa-, Iƛƛa-, Ỉįįa-, Ỉka-, Kekka-, Kelga-, Kỉ(įįa)-, Kỉka-, Ṃủįa-, Nỉƛa-, Oįįa-, Opṃa-, Pỉƛƛa-, Ṛilga-, Ṛirka-, Ṛiṛṛa-, Tṡaiha-, Ṫsuohi-, Uįįi, Uṛṛa-, Vỉva-, Vovi- and Vuovva-. Some of the most common second combined names are: -aḍḍa, -beuha, -dalda, -daḷḷa, -gaḍḍat, -gaksi, -gassi, -gidda, -hey, -hoaḍḍi, -iddi, -illįi, -iƛƛen, -irat, -katvi, -kaikkas, -kekka, -kelga, -kỉ, -kukta, -pilġi, -ṛilga, -saḍna -saḷḷa -tṡeva, -vaiha, -vaƛƛa and -vỉva.

Aḍḍakỉ

Aividalda

Asƛadaḷḷa

Balmaiddi

Daldaṛilga

Ẻḥḥigaksi

Gaksikỉ

Gassigidda

Hauddavỉva

Heykatvi

Hįiƛƛibeuha

Hoahhagaksi

Humaiƛƛen

Iddikỉ

Ilįaiddi

Ilppakelga

Iƛƛakỉ

Ỉįįakukta

Ỉkakỉ

Kekkahey

Kelgaillįi

Kỉdalda

Kỉkakaikkas

Ṃủįagassi

Nỉƛaiƛƛen

Oįįasaḷḷa

Opṃavaƛƛa

Pỉƛƛapilġi

Ṛilgairat

Ṛirkaiddi

Ṛiṛṛakỉ

Tṡaihagaḍḍat

Tṡuohiaḍḍa

Uįįikekka

Uṛṛahoaḍḍi

Vỉvakekka

Vovidaḷḷa

Vuovvaiddi

§4.7.1.1.3 Compound Names

Compound names are simple names which are augmented by a prefix, which cannot otherwise stand on their own as a name. For example, Tammuṛṛa is made up of tamm- ‘big’ an uṛṛa ‘mist’. Prefixes are not gendered, although female names are slightly more commonly compounded than male names.

ả(į)-‘clear’
ai-/aį-‘clear’
antt(a)-‘great’
asƛ(a)-‘pure’
be(v)-‘elegant’
gvai(į)-‘all’
ġvỉ(v)-‘big’
har(ttso-)‘battle’
hoa(h)-‘sky’
pỏ(v)-‘courageous’
ỉ(į)-‘power’
ik(k(a))-‘good’
ikṇ(e)-‘eagle’
iƛ(ƛ(o))-‘beautiful’
įả-‘courageous’
įaįį-‘courageous’
kỉ(v)-‘new’
ƛỷ(v)-‘sly’
mai(v)-‘smile’
mi(g)-‘true’
mỉ(n)-‘one’
miṡ(ko)-‘medicine’
ṃikt(a)-‘heavy, strong’
nen(e)-‘friend’
nin(do)-‘young’
rau(g)-‘strong’
rik(ƛ(o))-‘bold’
rỉ(k)-‘bold’
ṛi(ṛ(ṛ))-‘raven’
ṛuk(vo)-‘ring’
sulg(e)-‘heart’
tam(m(i))-‘big’
tan-‘big’
tankk(o)-‘king’
toa(v)-‘slender’
tsuo(k)-‘needle’
uįį(o)-‘great’
ulk(k(o))-‘chest’
ủ(v)-‘beautiful’
ủḳ-‘completely’
ủkva-‘completely’
ủl(o)-‘ancient’
vỏ(v)-‘very’

Examples of male prefixed compound names are given here:

Ảdalgot

Aiġvenit

Gvaihuḍḍut

Ġvỉvỉr

Harƛalgut

Ikkoįįir

Ikṇuįįak

Ỉtahut

Kỉbakvut

Kỉtỏ

Ƛỷvuovvit

Maihoahha

Migỉr

Mỉkukta

Miṡpalġa

Ṃiktanƛƛur

Nendalgot

Ninttỏ

Pỏkengir

Raukikta

Ṛukvoįįir

Sulgỉr

Tambakvut

Tammaihhyt

Tankkủnut

Tsuokaukka

Uįįuįįak

Ulkkengir

Ủlttỏ

Examples of female prefixed compound names are given here:

Aįaḍḍa

Anttaiṡṡi

Asƛủn

Bedalda

Harkỉ

Ikvaihi

Iƛṃigi

Įảgaksi

Įaįįỏmi

Kỉvỉka

Maimiṡmi

Migỏmi

Mỉsivi

Nenủn

Nindyry

Pỏselga

Rỉkảmi

Ṛiṛṛỏmi

Ṛukkỉ

Sulgỏġġen

Tammiddi

Toavunttsi

Uįįuṛṛa

Ủnỉƛa

Ủkvủa

Ủlủn

Vỏviƛƛa

§4.7.1.2 Proper Name Diminutives

Proper names can have a diminutive form in many cases, which are used as nicknames, or by closely familiar people or as a sign of endearment. They are not entirely predictable, end often end in lax vowels or long lax vowels. Common suffixes for diminutives include -ủ, -ỏ, -(o)bo, -(e)bis, -ỉ, -is, -(o)ko, -(e)ke(n) or -e. Diminutives often involve significant simplification or clusters. Some diminutives have become so common that they may be used as proper names in their own rights, such as Ảįe, Annủ, Koḍken, Įoiko, Ỉkỉ, Ỉkỏ or Sỉbis, sometimes due to foreign influences. Below are given some of the most common diminutives of the most common male and female names.

male diminutives

1.AlguAllủ, Aggủ, Allet, Aggis, Alge
2.MiginMiggỏ, Migobo, Migis, Miken, Mikủ
3.DalgotDallủ, Daggủ, Dalbo, Dalloko
4.NiḷḷįutNinni, Niḷḷįủ, Nilbis, Niḷke, Niḷḷįe
5.UįįunỦįủ, Uįįobo, Ubbis, Ủįe, Uiken
6.(Ảįy)kengirẢbbis, Kengỏ, Ảįis, Ảįe, Aike
7.KoḍmutKohhỏ, Kobbo, Koḍḍis, Komme, Koḍken
8.EįįakEįįis, Eibbis, Eįįỏ, Eįįỉ, Eįįe, Eike
9.KunnaKủnủ, Kubbis, Kủbo, Kủko
10.Anƛƛa, AnƛƛurAnƛƛỏ, Annủ, Aƛƛỉ, Ane, Anke

female diminutives

1.ỈkakỉỈke, Ỉkỏ, Ỉkebis, Ỉkỉ
2.DaldaDabbis, Dalle, Dallis, Dallỏ
3.AḍḍaAhe, Ahủ, Ahỉ, Aḍko, Ako
4.ĮaįįỏmiĮaįįỏ, Įaįįe, Įaiko, Įaįįỏbis, Įaįįobo
5.IlppaIlle, Ilbis, Illỉ, Illủ
6.TủliTulle, Tulleke, Tulloko, Tủlủ
7.LaldaLalle, Lallủ, Lallis, Laleke
8.ỦlủnỦlủ, Ủlỏ, Ủle, Ulloko, Ulle
9.KỉgassiKỉgỉ, Kỉge, Kissoko, Kissebis, Gassủ
10.SiviSỉ, Sỉbis, Sibbe, Sỉke, Sissủ, Sisse

§4.7.2 Surnames

Traditionally, Pine people do not use family names but instead surnames based on the name of one or both parents (a patronymic or a matronymic surname), the place where they come from (toponymic surnames), a parent and a grandparent, cognominal surname that would distinguish them or identify them to those who are close to them or who might be able to understand the people or places referred to in their surnames. In recent times, matro- and patronymic surnames have gained great popularity, as they are more systematically adaptable to the modern world.

When proper names are used as part of a surname, they are more commonly found in the asematic with relaxed vowels (if the names end in a vowel) than in the genitive. Should both the mother’s and the father’s name be used, the first name is usually followed by -t if vowel final, for example Uṛṛa-t Eįįak AlguAlgu, son of Uṛṛa and Eįįak’. Both patronymic and matronymic surnames may contain the suffixes -minda or -min ‘daughter’ and -nenut ‘son’, for example Uṛṛaminda or Eįįaġnenut. Names in -t have -mmin/-mminda and -nnenut, nouns in -k have -ġminda/-ġmin and -ġnenut. When both a patronymic and matronymic surname is used with these suffixes, as is common, the suffix is commonly on found on one or the other name, for example Uṛṛanenut Eįįak Algu, or more commonly Uṛṛa-t Eįįaġnenut Algu. Toponyms are usually in the inessive, for example Migihauįįa Algu ‘Algu from Migiha.

As an example of a cognominal surname, a woman named Ỉkakỉ whose mother, Kelga, is a teacher, might be known as Taįįeggen Kelgo Ỉkakỉ, or ‘teaching Kelga’s Ỉkakỉ’. She may choose to identify herself differently in a context where she knew that her mother, Taįįeggen Kelga, would work as a reference point, and instead simply say Kelgo Ỉkakỉ.

In more recent times, many Pine people have systematised patronymic or matronymic surnames, often both, for official purposes. Taking the example above, and knowing that Ỉkakỉ’s father’s name is Niḷḷįut, her full name would most likely be listed as Kelgo-t Niḷḷįumminda Ỉkakỉ. The most common order in official listings is [mother’s](-t) [father’s](-min/-minda/-nenut).

§4.7.3 Toponyms

Pine toponyms are in many ways similar to proper names in that they are often either simple or compound words. Many toponyms in Pine however contain suffixes, some of which have lost their meaning to time. Some toponyms are clear descriptives while others have less transparent meanings or no known meaning at all. These suffixes are technically specialised teleutophonic endings, such that the rest of the word is not affected by diaphony or apophony. For example, the lake Lįuvveṡin has the sematic form Lįuvveṡima or Lįuvveṡimma, and Opṃaġat is Opṃả in the sematic.

The declension pattern of these teleutophonic suffixes either aligns with the final vowel if short, or follows apocoptic nouns in -ġ if the vowel is long. For example, toponyms in -maġat have -mả in the sematic, -mavet in the illative and -mavỉn in the elative, while toponyms in -ets have -eḍḍa in the sematic, -eḍḍot in the illative and -eḍḍunnit in the elative.

nounsuffix
asematicsematic
aįi‘clear’-ai-aįįa
amaġat‘peninsula’-maġat-mả
anƛi‘river through lake’-an-anƛƛa
appi‘glacial lake’-at, -abi-ả
arket‘(steep) mountain’-ar-ora
balvoddi‘lowland’-bal-baƛa
biḍḍitṇa‘marshland’-bits-biḍḍa, -beva
bikka‘mountain side’-bit, -bet-bikka
bikkukku‘inlet’-bikkut-bikkukka
bikva‘bay’-bit, -bet-ben, -bikva
bůrġġi~bůrįi‘foaming rapids’-byr-bůrįa
duġġu‘innermost part of lake’-dủ-duġġu
eḍḍa‘rock face, cliff’-ets-eḍḍa, -eva
ẻlduha‘fen’-ẻl-ẻldo, -ẻƛa
elet‘field, tract’-el-eƛa
gaulka‘village’-g(g)a-g(g)auƛa
gekkun‘hill’-get-gen, -gikka
ġylki‘mountain’-ġ(ġ)ỷ, -ġ(ġ)ỉ-ġ(ġ)ůva, -ġ(ġ)iva
halda‘place’-(h)al, -(h)a, -va-(h)aƛa, -(h)avi, -vavi
iḍnu‘marsh, bog’-its-iḍḍa, -iḍna, -eva
ỉrƛa‘ridge’-ỉr-irƛƛa
ỉṛṛu‘passage’-ỉr-iṛṛỏ
inttsu‘fork, point’-inits, -ỉts, -ints-intson, (-ỉva)
kảḷḷeddit‘highland, highest point’-kảl-kảƛen
keƛka‘turn’-kelga-keƛko
keggi‘day’-ken-kenga
kigga‘forest’-kik, -kit-kiggon
kinkkur‘flat mountain’-kin-kinkora
luġta‘plateau’-lokta-lủ
ḷakka‘mountain waterfall’-ḷat-ḷukka
ḷỉdda‘lava field’-ḷỉt-ḷỉdda
ḷuįosset‘wading point’-ḷủ-ḷuįįu
tġakti‘tongue’-tġat, -ġat-tġoaġten, -ġoaġten
moni‘path’-mun-modni
nỉnin‘port’-nỉn-nỉdna
nůayƛƛi‘slow flowing river’-nůal-nůayƛa
ṇįaḥḥi‘woods’-(ṇ)ṇįat-(ṇ)ṇįon, -(ṇ)ṇįukka
ṇįaukku‘birch forest’-(ṇ)ṇįaut-(ṇ)ṇįaun, -(ṇ)ṇįaukka
ṇubmi‘river bay’-(ṇ)ṇun-(ṇ)ṇoma
ṇukva‘head’-(ṇ)ṇut-(ṇ)ṇon, -(ṇ)ṇukka
ṇuokkoset‘wooded area’-(ṇ)ṇuot-(ṇ)ṇuon, -(ṇ)ṇủkka
ṇurkur‘burnt area’-(r)kur-(r)kora
oppi‘cave’-ot-ỏ
ỏka‘spring’-ot, -ỏk-ỏ, -ỏġa~-oġa
opṃuna‘glacier’-upṃun-uṃṃa
piġumi~biġumi‘fjord’-piġun, -biġun-piġġun, -biġġun
sallįa‘river shore’-s(s)ai-s(s)aįįu
sevvi‘river’-sivi, -si-sỉvvu, -sỉ
sinttsu‘narrowing’-sinits, -sỉts-sintson, -sỉḍḍa, -sỉva
skaįi‘clear river’-skai, -skoi-skaiįįů
ṡinnen‘lake’-ṡin-ṡim(m)a
tapṃa‘main river’-tan, -dan-taṃṃa, -daṃṃa
tasku‘small forest, woods’-tas, -das-taskon, -taktson
tepṃa‘stream’-ten-tema
tsaƛƛemỉn‘waterway’-tsalmỉn-tsalma
talla‘land between’-tal, -dal-taƛa, -daƛa
tṃisas‘boulder’-ṃṃis-pṃa
tỏ‘rock’-tỏ, -dỏ-toįįu, -doįįu
tṡilla‘island’-tṡi-tṡỉ
tṡyġli‘rapids’-tṡyk, -tṡuk-tṡůkƛi, -tṡukƛu
ủn‘geothermal creek’-ủn, -un-ủngon
vunga‘valley’-(v)onga-(v)uknen
vungolis‘small river valley’-(v)ongul-(v)ongoƛa

Examples of teleutophonic toponyms include:

asematicillative
TammanTammanƛƛot
PỉƛƛuṡṡinPỉƛƛuṡṡimot
TỏngaTỏvuknet
ꟜallaskaiꟜallaskaiįįůt
TammekkurTammekkoret
AnttaṃṃisAnttapṃot
AitenAitemůt
SinttsỉrSinttsirƛƛot
ẢįytẢįůvet
ArkupṃunArkuṃṃot
TỏggaTỏggauƛot
TỏdalTỏdaƛot
OpṃaloktaOpṃaluvet
AmakkurAmakkoret
MįakkurMįakkoret
PauṡṡinPauṡṡimot
TṡevvỉtsTṡevvỉḍḍot
SinnỉnSinnỉdnot
LalttṡinLalttṡimot
MįilgotMįilgovet
TůįįotTůįįovet
LỏsiLỏsỉvot
ḶakkaiḶakkaįįot
ṆuokkỉrṆuokkỉrƛƛot
KỉkikKỉkiggot
AitskenAitskengot
PiḍḍįatsalmỉnPiḍḍįatsalmot
KảlġỉKảlġivot
AtṇutAtṇukkot
MigimaġatMigimavet
MigisiviMigisỉvot
PitṡkussaiPitṡkussaįįot
PilġuḷatPilġuḷukkot
HỉdnepiġunHỉdnepiġġunet
OngulbiġunOngulbiġġunet
asematicillative
DalgvaDalgvavet
KaikṇehaKaikṇehavet
MitṇakelgaMitṇakeƛkot
GekkukkảlGekkukkảƛůt
MigihaMigihavet
KủkkenKủkkengot
SkaįįotSkaįįovet
ṂủįủnṂủįủngot
ṠirttsiṠirttsỉvot
TankkinTankkinkoret
KįỉddaKįỉddavet
HįalkvinHįalkvinkoret
TsikvabitTsikvabikkot
UṛṛogetUṛṛogikkot
ĠveneḷủĠveneḷuįįot
TṡemmatTṡemmavet
TůaƛkitTůaƛkiggotAnƛƛurtṇunAnƛƛurtṇomot
BinttṡiBinttṡivot
BimbikkutBimbikkukkot
SinttalSinttaƛet
AnttỉrAnttỉṛṛot
TṡattsodủTṡattsoduġġet
HỉnnůalHỉnnůayƛƛet
KaltṡaKaltṡavet
KįủṇṇunKįủṇṇomot
KunnumunKunnumodnet
ỦḷḷỉtỦḷḷỉddot
TỏhaTỏhavet
TsakkavaTsakkavavet
IḍnabiIḍnavet

§4.8 Compound Nouns

Compound nouns are nouns that contain more than are composed of one noun and one or more words. The constituents of the compound nouns given below are separated by hyphens for clarity, but compound words are not otherwise hyphenated, unless two identical vowels appear sequentially, in which case some may choose to use a hyphen, although it is not necessary, for example ulkkootski or ulkko-otski ‘headband’. In the case of -i-i-, the former -i- may be deleted, for example ohakk-ilbi ‘rose’ (not *ohakki-ilbi or *ohakke-ilbi). Relaxation does not occur if the resulting sequence is not allowed, for example -i + a- does not result in -ea- but -ia-. Other changes that correct for disallowed clusters also occur, for example -n + s- become -ntts-, as Pine does not allow *-n-s-. In some cases, illegal sequences do occur as there is no way to avoid them, for example gebme-ảvvyt ‘personality’. The tail of the compound noun, as opposed to its head, is usually an unmarked noun (noun-noun compounds) or a genitive of either a noun or an adjective (genitive-noun compounds). Compound tails can also be verbal prefixes such as initials (geg-aṇṇu ‘choice, selection) or preverb (gaġva-lỏbma ‘hibernation’).

§4.8.1 Noun-Noun Compounds

Noun-noun compounds are formed by combining two nouns. The final noun is the head of the compound, and the initial noun has some sort of qualifying role to the head noun. Most commonly, the qualifying noun appears in the asematic case with relaxation of final vowels for vowel-final nouns (although -a remains -a), and also in the case of some consonant-final nouns, especially if they have an animate meaning. Some sound changes can occur, namely consonantal nouns in -t may combine with a consonant-initial head noun such that the -t disappears and causes gemination. Homorganic nouns may appear with an -n- when part of a compound and preceding a vowel. Apocoptic nouns are usually found in their sematic form in compounds, as are some teleutophonic nouns (often those whose sematic form ends in a geminate vowel).

(3)compoundmeaningconstituents
nakva-keggi‘birthday’birth + day
aldo-telkvi‘author’book + writer
daldo-ṛilgut‘sunshine’sun + shining
gebme-ảvvyt‘character, personality’mind + nature
gebme-sauḍḍa‘mental illness, trauma’mind + burden
hartṇe-vulmaDryas octopetalafeather + leaf
passin-ulpṇa‘ear infection’ear + swelling
vovva-kiktaMonotropa unifloradeath + bone
iḍnįe-tsġugu‘silouhette, outline’shape + picture
illįa-lakka‘way of life’life + way
illįekve-nekni‘body part’body + part
ỉlįả-midda‘biology’life + knowledge
kvaubmes-ỉr‘fibula’bear + arrow
lemppa-gieḍbi‘framework’word + drying frame
meḍkve-linnu‘law’rule + word
meḍkve-linno-midda‘law’rule + word + knowledge
meḍkve-linno-middi‘lawyer’rule + word + knower
meḍkve-piska‘police’rule + obeying
meḍkve-piska-sakvin‘police man’rule + obeying + man
miṇṇo-hala‘culture’people + habit
miṇṇo-hįiḷḷu‘history’people + story
miṇṇo-tsalla‘politics’people + issue
miṇṇo-tsalla-niṡki‘politician’people + issue + person
miṡko-midda‘medicine’medicine + knowledge
naġpe-hįiƛƛa‘vague recollection’back of head + memory
niṡke-mikvi‘(human) rights’person + rights
nįalpe-bakvi‘ovary’cone + house
ṇukvo-paggun‘headache’head + ache
ṇuokko-boġġi‘tree branch’tree + branch
ohakk-ilbi‘rose’thorn + flower
piḷḷu·tṡuḷḷįin·ohuva‘shrubby cinquefoil’red + stalk + rose
Pỉƛƛu-ḷủlut‘Pine’pine + language
sivi-sulgi‘sweetheart’honey + heart
skuḷḷo-algu‘breastfeeding’milk + gift
spinga-billįu‘ladybug’freckle + berry
sulge-tapṃa‘artery’hear + main river
tsaƛƛa-siġġuma‘drop of water’water + drop
piġvut-randat‘weekend’week + last part
koakkủ-telgu‘email’electricity + letter

§4.8.2 Genitive-Noun Compounds

Compounds can be made up of a head noun preceded by a noun, or an adjective, in the genitive. The genitive constituent does not usually change when combined with the head noun, even if illegal sequences are formed. Most apocoptic nouns form genitive-noun compounds.

(4)compoundmeaningconstituents
gảhi-bįelkka‘value’worth’s + belief
geummu-humutsġa‘psychosis’mind’s + eclipse
geummu-skukkissun‘burn out, depression’mind’s + fatigue
hảlli-maḍkvi‘routine’custom’s + rule
ỉlįon-dihu‘life time’life’s + run
ỉṡon-ilppits‘puberty’age’s + bloom
iṡṡut-bakvi‘nursing home’olds’ + house
ṇįeḷḷỷ-bakvi‘hospital’sickness’ + house
sṇảdnen-ṡillįur‘ovule’flower’s + female
soaṃṃen-půbma‘extreme’edge’s + point
tammủ-hallikƛun‘magnitude’size’s + difference
teulpṃon-vukvi‘black bird’dusk’s + bird (also telmevukvi)
tsaḷḷa-midda‘chemistry’material’s + knowledge
uįo-midda‘morality’right’s + knowledge
tsảmppả-ṇįahava‘senility’‘old age + haze’

§4.8.3 Prefix-Noun Compounds

Prefix-noun compounds have a prefix often derived or identical to verbal initials, such as kinetic initials or adverbial initials. Nearly all verb-derived prefix-noun compounds are either action nouns (in -a) or result nouns (in -u).

(5)compoundmeaningconstituents
uṡṡ-alkka‘refusal’wrong + giving
uṡ-ƛủmu‘lie’wrong + speech
gaġ-tủlla‘obsession’circularly + thinking
geg-aṇṇu‘choice, selection’from + choice
gi-hallikƛun‘divergence’from + differ
gi-tenttsa‘missing’from + longing
gi-vitsku‘mourning’from + regret
huvvud-ella‘collapsee’poorly + growing
iggin-ella‘prosperity’well + growing
iggiƛ-ƛisƛa‘harmony’well + singing
iggis-siƛƛa‘perfume’well + smelling
ỉ-bįella‘reflection’through + thinking
ỉ-gi-saskuddun‘realization’through + from + awakening
ỉ-lukka‘success’through + piercing
ỉ-ṛilkka‘transparency’through + shining
ỉ-tsůƛƛa‘completion’through + carrying
ỉl-ditta‘volunteering’forward + stepping
ỉl-ella‘progress’forward + growing
ỉl-miekka‘presentation’forward + showing
ỉl-nekka‘excitement’forward + seeing
keu-lủbmittsun‘debate’with + debating
keu-nedna‘agreement’with + sitting
key-tsůƛƛa‘meaning’with + carrying
sis-anƛỉggun‘attraction’in + lassoing
sis-ella‘development’in + growing
sis-ilkka‘entry’in + moving
sis-uįįavvun‘adaptation’in + endure
si-kauḷįa‘addition’in + mend
si-kupṇa‘collision’in + colliding
gilt-ṇegu‘prediction’before + sight
gil-tṡannu‘discovery’before + find
tsỉṛ-ṛilkka‘radiation’radially + shining
issi-meg-ella‘prosperity, thriving’well + in + growing
issi-lủmu‘pronunciation’correct + speech
issi-nekka‘understanding’correct + seeing
issi-niṡpa‘care’correct + keeping
issi-nįikka‘appreciation’correct + taking
issi-tepṃa‘fluency’correct + flow
ůl-mỉdna‘relation, relationship’close + walking
giḷ-ki-disƛa‘cause’before + from + rolling
eġ-ỏkka‘regret’after + watching

Other prefixes can also be found in compound nouns, namely adverbs, but they are not nearly as common:

(6)įaugga-siġva‘torrential rain’immensely + rain
gảḍmet-tuvva‘left-turn’left + turning
ƛaġtsi-ṇukva‘distracted person’turvy + head
ỏġmin-dallįi‘distant past’long ago + time
sảsi-dallįi‘free time’between + time
hảlttůsket-nįikka‘preference, alternative’instead + taking
ủkv-uġġu‘eradication’utterly + distruction

§4.8.4 Medialization

Medialization is the incorporation of aspectual medials directly before the last vowel or syllable of a noun. Aspectual medials do not have specific nominalised forms, unlike voice and derivative medials. Medialization does not affect nominal declensions at all. This means that a bisyllabic noun with a one syllable medial infix continues to behave as though it was still bisyllabic, even though it is now trisyllabic. For example, the verb ḷįuḍk- ‘soak’ has the nominalised form ḷįuḍkaḷįůetken ‘soaking, soak’, and from the durative form of the verb, ḷįuḍk-ulġ- ‘let soak (for a long time)’, the nominalised form is ḷįuḍk-ulġ-aḷįůetk-ilġ-en ‘(long) soak, letting soak’. This also illustrates that although the noun itself otherwise is unaffected by medialization, the medial itself still harmonises with the previous syllable. In some cases, the nominalizing suffix of voice and derivative medials, such as -ỉggun (corresponding to verbs in -ỉg-) may be preceded by aspectual medials, in which case medialization occurs not before the last syllable but before the nominaliser suffix, which is opposite to the order seen in the verb. For example, vapṇỉg- ‘smoke’ ⟫ vapṇỉg-add- ‘smoke (many things/pieces of meat)’ then becomes vapṇỉggun ‘smoking’ ⟫ vapṇ-add-ỉggun ‘smoking (of many things)’, where the aspectual medial -add- follows the verbal medial -ỉg- (-ỉg-add-) but precedes the nominaliser -ỉggun (-add-ỉggun).

Below are example of medialization

(7)adda ảten‘control’
iss-add-add-a iss-ảt-add-en‘management, administration’
beiska beiktso‘irritation’
beisk-in-a beikts-in-o‘erosion’
(8)gikkagỉggon‘gathering’
gikk-in-agỉgg-in-on‘keeping, shelf-life (of food)’
ġoppaġvůabbi‘knocking’
ġopp-ask-aġvůabb-ask-i‘(repeated) knocking’
(9)haṡkahảktṡi‘slumber’
haṡk-ỏh-ahảktṡ-ẻh-i‘dormancy’
(10)įarpṃaįảrmen‘pouting’
įarpṃ-aƛƛ-aįảrm-aƛƛ-en‘pouting (often, repeatedly)’
(11)kảƛƛakảḷḷen‘growth, growing taller’
kảƛƛ-iḷḷ-akảḷḷ-iḷḷ-en‘growth spurt’
(12)lolttalůalten‘leaving (something somewhere)’
inu-loltt-aƛƛ-ainu-lůalt-aƛƛ-en‘leaving things everywhere’
ḷunttaḷůenten‘bump, bumping’
ḷuntt-itṇ-aḷůent-itṇ-en‘slam, slamming, hard bump’
(13)piskapỉktso‘listening’
pisk-ilġ-apỉkts-ilġ-o‘attention, paying attention’
(14)nįulpṃanįůelmen‘nap’
nįulpṃ-iṡ-anįůelm-iṡ-en‘short nap’
(15)ỏktsaeůġtsen‘shaking’
ỏkts-itṇ-aeůġts-itṇ-en‘agitation, vigorous shaking’
(16)rittsarỉtson‘complaining’
ritts-its-arỉts-its-on‘whining, complaining’
(17)sekkaseiggo‘understanding, grip’
sekk-itt-aseigg-itt-o‘sudden understanding, getting (a joke)’
(18)tebmateimmo‘flux, flow’
tebm-ẻh-ateimm-ẻh-o‘slow flow’
(19)tůįįitstůįįeva‘deepening’
tůįį-isk-itstůįį-isk-eva‘sudden deepening’
(20)tṡarttatṡảrten‘scare, worry, anguish’
tṡartt-isk-atṡảrt-isk-en‘shock’
(21)uktaůġten‘placing, placement, setting’
iss-ukt-add-aiss-ůġt-add-en‘organizing, tidying up’
(22)vapṇỉggunvapṇỉkoma‘smoking’
vapṇ-add-ỉggunvapṇ-add-ỉkoma‘smoking (of many things)’

§4.9 Nominalization

Verb nominalization describes changing a verb into a noun. Verb nominalization may involve forming a result or action noun from a verb, nominalizing the agent or patient of a verb, or locative, instrumental or temporal nominalization of verbs – forming nouns that indicate something about a location related to a verb, a tool or instrument that performs or aids in performing the action indicated by the verb, or nouns related to time when a verb occurs.

§4.9.1 Result Nominalization

(23)asematicsematic
-u -oga

Nouns in -u indicate the outcome or result of a verb from which they are derived. A handful of nouns in this class are not derived from verbs, or from verbs that are no longer in use, for example sƛuombu ‘tumble, minor accident’ (there is no such verb as *sƛuombb-). Result nouns in -u are in the weakest grade compared to the verb from which they derive.

(24)siḷḷuθ-‘do’siḷḷusỉƛƛoga‘action, deed’
alk-‘give’alguoalkkoga‘gift’
iġ-‘run’iġuỉġġoga‘run’
ẻrƛ-‘stress’ẻrƛuįorƛƛoga‘stress, pressure’
geg-atṇ-‘choose’geg-aṇṇugegoatṇoga‘choice, selection’
lidn-‘say’linnulỉdnoga‘word’
sakṡ-‘warn’saṡṡusoakṡoga‘warning’
tủl-‘think’tủlutủlloga‘thought,
tsġugg-‘draw’tsġugutsġvuokkoga‘image’
(25)-ḷḷa

Nouns in -ḷḷa are derived from translative verbs in -uƛ- and indicate the result of the verb from which they are derived.

(26)boiƛƛuƛ-‘coagulate’boiƛƛuḷḷa‘coagulation, coagulated blood’
ƛiknuƛ-‘turn out to be’ƛiknuḷḷa‘revelation, epiphany’
stiḍḍuƛ-‘get injured’stiḍḍuḷḷa‘injury, lesion’
tunuƛ-‘get pregnant’tunuḷḷa‘pregnancy’
tṡorvuƛ-‘rot (of wood)’tṡorvuḷḷa‘rot, rotten wood’
ulbnuƛ-‘swell’ulbnuḷḷa‘inflammation’
(27)-ma

Nouns in -ma form various result derivatives of translative verbs.

(28)muƛƛ-‘crumble’muƛƛuma‘crumble’
reknuƛ-‘open’reknuma‘opening, gap’
tulpṇuƛ-‘crack’tulpṇuma‘fissure, crack’
tṡvaiḍḍiġƛuθ-‘evaporate’tṡvaiḍḍama‘dew, condensation’
asematicsematic
-ngis -kna
Nouns in -ngis are derived from verbs and indicate the result of the verb, and also carry a diminutive meaning.
(29)kusk-‘cut’kuskungis‘small cut’
nild-~nird-‘split (wood)’nildingis~nirdingis‘split (in wood)’
skirtt-‘shake’skirttingis‘concussion’
tỏlt-‘rip’tỏltingis‘(small) rip (in clothes)’
dir-‘sway’diringis‘swaying (of trees)’
(30)-tsġa

Nouns in -tsġa are semelfactive derivatives of verbs, indicating the result of a quick or sudden action.

(31)aiv-‘be clear’aivitsġa‘sudden clearing up of weather’
huḍḍiθ-‘flash’huḍḍitsġa‘flash, sudden flash of light’
ilppeḍ-‘bloom’ilppitsġa‘puberty’
ṇįeḷḷ-‘be sick’ṇįeḷḷitsġa‘sudden sickness’
nutṇuƛ-‘become angry’nutṇutsġa‘sudden fit of anger’
(32)-tsƛa

Nouns in -tsƛa indicate some sort of irresultative outcome of an irresultative verb in -its-, either underlining that the action is unsuccessful or undertaken without hopes or expectations of an end result, for example inuminitsƛa ‘a leisurely walk’.

(33)dollits-‘continue’dollitsƛa‘perseverence, obstination’
dulbits-‘sew’dulbitsƛa‘leisurely, unsuccessful sewing’
giuggits-‘duck’giuggitsƛa‘avoidance, escapism’
soƛƛ(its)-‘fish’soƛƛitsƛa‘leisurely, unsuccessful fishing’
-ut

Nouns in -ut indicate some sort of result related to the noun. Verbs often undergo diaphony to a weak grade when they become nominalised by -ut, although not always.

(34)tulluġt-‘conceptualise’tullut‘concept’
ḷủl-‘talk’ḷủlut‘language’
ṡelk-‘wash’ṡelgut‘wash, clothes (to be washed), load’
tṡattṡ-‘give birth’tṡatṡut‘litter’
neg-‘see’negut‘sight (something to be seen)’

§4.9.2 Action Nominalization

(35)-a

Nouns in -a are action nouns derived from verbs and are found in the strongest grade compared to the verb from which they derive. They are very common, as -a is a very productive nominalization suffix. Not all nouns in -a derived from verbs are strictly action nouns, some are closer in meaning to result nouns, but they are generally more abstract than any corresponding result noun if they exist.

(36)aidd-‘advise’aitta‘advice, advising’
bįell-‘believe’bįella‘belief, believing’
ell-‘grow’ella‘growth’
ilg-‘go, travel’ilkka‘travel, journey, moving’
ƛisƛ-‘sing’ƛisƛa‘singing’
neg-‘see’nekka‘sight, seeing’
ṛilg-‘shine’ṛilkka‘shining’
taltṡ-‘doubt’talttṡa‘doubt, doubting’
tủl-‘think’tủlla‘thinking, reflection’
ulbnuƛ-‘swell’ulpṇa‘swelling’
unts-‘dance’unttsa‘dancing, dance’
-uġa/-aġa
Nouns in -uġa/-aġa (sometimes -oġa) are mostly abstract derivatives.
(37)durd-‘snarl’durduġa‘rudeness, impolite behavior’
kintṡ-‘lightning’kintṡuġa‘lightning’
midd-‘know’middaġa‘awareness, consciousness’
otti‘deity’ottuġa‘god, steam, breath’
(38)-ġma

Nouns in -ġma are various action or result derivatives of verbs, often more abstract than simple action or result nouns.

(39)allag-‘disturb’allaġma‘disturbance, turmoil’
biṡt-‘quarrel’biṡtaġma‘fight, dispute’
bįodn-‘joke, play’bįodnaġma‘humor, joking’
bulb-‘bustle’bulbuġma‘activity, action’
ġvevv-‘bark’ġvevvaġma‘commotion, ruckus’
keƛk-‘meander’keƛkaġma‘digression, detour’
tủl-‘think’tulluġma‘idea, notion’
(40)-kvi
Nouns in -kvi are abstract derivatives of verbs and indicate an abstract or collective noun.
lủbm-‘speak’lủbmakvi‘communication’
ḷủl-‘talk’ḷủlukvi‘expression, saying’
nesk-‘ask’neskukvi‘interrogation, challenge’
nįav-‘use’nįavakvi‘yield, efficiency’
sigg-‘hear’siggakvi‘listening, attention’

§4.9.3 Locative Nominalization

Locative nominalised nouns are nouns derived from verbs that indicate a place where the verb occurs.

(41)-it

Nouns in -it indicate a location, often designated for a purpose or a wider or less concrete location than location nouns in -na.

(42)aįįeg-‘teach’aįįit‘school’
disƛ-‘roll’disƛit‘hem’
ẻlduƛ-‘sink, sag’ẻldit‘fen, marsh’
ilg-‘move, travel’ilgit‘route’
kįủvuƛ-‘widen’kįủvit‘widening in river’
gigg-‘gather’giggit‘public place, gathering area’
maḍḍ-‘hunt’maḍḍit‘hunting territory’
migv-‘eat’migvit‘place to eat, kitchen, eating spot’
tulpṇuƛ-‘crack’tulpṇit‘place where something is cracked’
tsint-‘drink’tsintit‘drinking area, bar’
unts-‘dance’untsit‘dancing circle/area’
vapṇỉg-‘smoke’vapṇỉgit‘smoking hut’
(43)asematicsematic
-es -eha

Nouns in -en indicate the location where a verb occurs, often a smaller location or room.

(44)bįodn-‘play, joke’bįodnes‘playground’
lỏm-‘sleep’lỏmes‘bedroom, bed’
migv-‘eat’migves‘dining room, spot to eat’
ṡelk-‘wash’ṡelkes‘bathroom, toilet’
tṡẻlġġ-‘cook’tṡẻlġġes‘kitchen’
asematicsematic
-in/-un-ema/-oma
Nouns in -in/-un depict a location or point where an action occurs or has occurred, usually more specific than location nouns in -it.
(45)ġvir-‘jump’ġvirin‘place to jump from’
mįutṇuƛ-‘slow down’mįutṇun‘place where flow slows down in river’
ỏk-‘watch’ỏkkun‘watch point, vantage point’
reknuƛ-‘open’rekkun‘opening, orifice’
rủv-‘burn’ruvvun‘burnt area’
ṛiḍḍį-‘cut, slice’ṛiḍḍįun‘place where one should start cutting’
vuovv-‘hide’vuovvun‘place to lie in hiding, hiding spot’

§4.9.4 Instrumental Nominalization

Instrumental nominalised nouns are nouns derived from verbs that indicate a tool or object related to the verb.
(46)asematicsematic
-at -ava
Nouns in -at indicate a tool often used to perform the verb from which it is derived. The ending -at is added onto the opposite grade to the verb.
marƛ-‘cut’marƛƛat‘meat cleaver’
oḍm-‘hallucinate’oṃṃat‘hallucinogenic drug’
sakṡ-‘warn’saṡṡat‘alarm’
utġod-‘ruin, destroy’uġġat‘weapon’
(47)asematicsematic
-(do)mis -(do)pṃa
Nouns in -mis or -domis indicate a tool or object that allows or facilitates the action of the verb from which they are derived to occur.
bold-‘lie down’bol(do)mis‘bed’
huoll-‘row’hulmis‘paddle’
min-‘walk’mindomis‘cane’
nen-‘sit’nendomis‘chair’
ruoḍḍ-‘burn’ruoḍḍomis‘fire-starter’

§4.9.5 Temporal Nominalization

Temporal nominalization is the derivation of nouns from verbs that depict a time, moment or period related to the verb.
(48)asematicsematic
-al -oƛa
Nouns in -al indicate a period when the action of the verb from which they are derived can or does happen.
(49)ilgilġ-‘migrate’ilgilġal‘migration period’
kuol-‘suckle’koldal‘nursing period’
ḷoagan-‘fast’ḷoagal‘fasting period’
maḍḍ-‘hunt’maḍḍal‘hunting period’
tṡattṡ-‘birth’tṡattṡal‘birthing period’
(50)-ġuk·ki
Nouns in -ġut indicate an occasion or some sort of ceremony or gathering organised around the timing of some action, and such nouns are always plural nouns.
sast-‘move’misasġukki‘house warming’
nakvỉg-‘give birth’nakvỉġġukki‘celebration after giving birth’
ilppeḍḍ-‘bloom’ilppeġġukki‘rite of passage during puberty’
gallįuƛ-‘switch side’daldagallįoġukki‘solstice’

§4.9.6 Agent & Patient Nominalization

Agent and patient nominalization is the formation of an agent or patient noun from a verb, that is a person who performs or is the subject of the action indicated by the verb or who is the recipient or object of the action.
(51)asematicsematic
-ϕi -ϕemma

The agent nominalization suffix -ϕi is added onto the verb to indicate the person who does the action.

(52)aįįeg-‘teach’aįįikki‘teacher’
lủbm-‘speak’lủbmi‘speaker’
pisk-‘listen’piski‘listener’
tṡẻlġġ-‘cook’tṡẻlġġi‘cook, chef’
(53)asematicsematic
-ϕussi -ϕussema

The patient nominalization suffix -uḳ is added onto the verb to indicate the person who does the action.

(54)aįįeg-‘teach’aįįikkussi‘apprentice’
ỉld-‘host’ỉlttussi‘guest, hostee’
kuold-‘suckle’kuolttussi‘suckling’
maḍḍ-‘hunt’maḍḍussi‘huntee, prey’
(55)asematicsematic
-iryt -ir
-urit -ur
Nouns in -iryt or -urit indicate an agent who performs the action often, a lot, or who is known or characterised by doing so.
(56)bauḷv-‘travel’bauḷvurit‘traveller, someone who travels a lot’
lỏm-‘sleep’lỏmurit‘someone who sleeps all the time’
ƛisƛ-‘sing’ƛisƛiryt‘singer, someone who likes singing, sings a lot’
maivv-‘smile’maivviryt‘someone who smiles a lot’
migv-‘eat’migviryt‘someone who eats a lot’
(57)-i
Nouns in -i can indicate an agent, usually unagentive or non-animate, that performs an action, or is somehow closely related to the action. Such nouns tend to have a different grade to the verb from whichthey are derived.
(58)aḍn-‘remain’aṇṇi‘remainder, rest’
ell-‘grow’eli‘vegetation’
gi-hiůƛƛ-‘flake off’hiůḷḷi‘dandruff, flake’
kirį-‘flow in’kirįi‘high tide’
kurt-add-‘itch’kurtti‘itch’
lįoal-‘flow out’lįoalli‘low tide’
ƛunƛ-‘be weak’ƛunƛƛi‘exhausted, dying animal’
ṇiůlts-‘ripple’ṇiůltsi‘ripple’
ṛaṡp-‘sting’ṛaṡpi‘sting, stinging sensation’
tṡalp-oḍ-‘contract’tṡalbi‘tightness, constriction’
utġ-uθ-‘be in ruins’uġġi‘ruins’

§4.10 Diminutives & Augmentatives

Pine makes somewhat regular use of diminutives and augmentatives, special forms of nouns that indicate a smaller or larger size respectively, although diminutives and augmentatives are not purely used for physical size – the diminutive can also indicate endearment. Although many diminutive noun derivatives exist, there exists one productive derivational ending for diminutives that can be applied to virtually any mono- or bisyllabic noun, and the same is true to a lesser extent of the augmentative. Trisyllabic nouns lack diminutive and augmentative forms all together. Diminutives are especially common when nouns are found with the attributive adjectives bįaggut ‘small (animate)’, bintṡet ‘small (inanimate)’ and especially ninnot ‘small, little’, while augmentatives are often found when the adjectives tammet ‘big’, kemmiḳ ‘great, big’ and ġvivi ‘large’ as well as the hyponomous adjectival verb form antt(v)en~antt(v)e(mi)~antt(v)at ‘large, huge’.

§4.10.1 Diminutives

The most productive diminutive suffixes are -ts, -ṡ, -bis, -uḳ(-aḳ)/-iḳ/-yḳ and -(u)tsit/-(i)tsut~(i)tsyt/-(y)tsyt. The latter two groups (-v and -tsvt) are productively added onto the asematic form of polysyllabic nouns or in certain cases on the sematic form (for example naukvatsit or naukvatsut and naukvaḳ ‘small dog, doggy’ are both accepted, from naukvis ‘dog’). Consonant-final polysyllabic nouns see their final consonant deleted before -bis, which appears as -bbis, and -tsit/-tsut/-tsyt similarly appear as -ttsit/-ttsut/-ttsyt. Bisyllabic diminutive nouns in -bis become labial trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -t while diminutive nouns in -tsit/-tsut/-tsyt are declined like trisyllabic consonantal nouns in -t. Monosyllabic nouns are made into diminutives by adding -bis/-tsvt into the sematic (and bisyllabic) form – with relaxation for -bis and without relaxation for -tsvt. While diminutives in -bis often create a new word semantically more distant to the base noun, suffixes in -tsit/-tsut/-tsyt are more emphatically diminutive and often carry a strong connotation of familiarity, endearment or infantilization, for example soaƛƛitsut ‘little fishy’ but soaƛƛebis ‘little fish, fry, a fish that is small’, or bįuoƛƛosset ‘to the little (baby) boy’ but bįuḷḷobis ‘small boy, young boy, little boy’ and mindutsuingit ‘from little (baby) girl, little girly-girls’ but mindobis ‘small girl, young girl, little girl’. It is not uncommon for diminutives in -tsit/-tsut/-tsyt to be used with adjectives bintṡet ‘small, little (inanimate)’ and bįaggut small, little (animate)’, for example bintṡet bakvitsummit ‘in a little house’. Sometimes, the suffixes -bis and -itsut/-utsit combine to form -bitsut/-bitsyt or -itsebit/-utsebit. This is an especially affectionate or endearing form, which is often suffixed to nicknames, for example the name Laiki can be modified to Laikebitsyt or Laikitsebit 'little Laiki'. It is famously found in the lullaby:

(59)nįummo įoa tṡuggobis tṡuggutsebit, nįummo įoa heyƛuoƛƛi
‘sleep now my baby, sleep all night

The suffixes -ts and - are mostly no longer productive, and most have experienced some sort of semantic drifting. For example, soḷḷuts is a diminutive form of soaƛƛi ‘fish’ but today only means ‘fry, fishling’. Likewise, kįulkuṡ was originally a diminutive form of kįulkki ‘mouth of animal’, but today it only refers to wolf or fox cubs. However, diminutives in -its are still productive and usually have a strong approbative or endearing connotation, for example naukvoits ‘(dear) little dog’ or mindaittsa ‘my (dear) little girl’.

(60)diminutive
base nounasematicsematic
(61)soaƛƛisoaƛƛebissayƛit
soaƛƛitsutsoaƛƛitson
soaƛƛiḳsoaƛƛeġva
soaƛƛuitssoaƛƛuiva
‘fish’‘little fish’
(62)tsukṇitsukṇebistsůeġnit
tsukṇitsuttsukṇitson
tsukṇiḳtsukṇeġva
tsukṇuitstsukṇuiva
‘knife’‘little knife’
(63)bįuḷḷubįuḷḷobisbįuoƛƛut
bįuḷḷutsitbįuḷḷutsen
bįuḷḷuḳbįuḷḷoġva
bįuḷḷuitsbįuḷḷuiva
‘boy’‘little boy’
(64)tỏ toįįobisdvuoįut
toįįutsittoįįutsen
toįįuḳtoįįoġva
toįįitstoįįeva
‘rock’‘little rock, pebble’
(65)boġġiboġġebisbůġit
boġġitsutboġġitsen
boġġiḳboġġeġva
boġġuitsboġġuiva
‘branch’‘little branch’
(66)vukvivukvebisvůegvit
vukvitsutvukvitson
vukviḳvukveġva
vukvuitsvukvuiva
‘bird’‘little bird’
(67)naukvisnaukvebbisnaygvit
naukvatsut~naukvittsutnaukvatson~naukvittson
naukvaḳnaukvaġva
naukvoitsnaukvoiva
‘dog’‘little dog’
(68)sakvinsakvebbissảgvit
sakvittsutsakvittson
sakviḳsakveġva
sakvuits~sakvemitssakvuiva~sakvemeva
‘man’‘little man’
(69)vukvittan kảḷḷen mi bįaggut vukviḳ įo
fukfittan kaaLLi-n mi p-jaggut fukfikf ju-
[ˈwʊʰkᶣɪʰtan ˈkæːɬːɛn mɪ ˈbjɑkːʊt ˈwʊʰkᶣɪkʷ jɔː]
Ø-vukv-itt-an kảḷḷ=en mi bįaggut vukv=iḳ-Ø įo
3a.ag-fly-dim-nloc high=adv det small bird=dim-act det.pron.3a
‘the little bird is flying high up in the air’
(70)a kammi-t da nả hikva naukvatsut~naukvoits?
a/ kammi_0 t-a naa h-ikfa naukfac-ut // naukfu-aic-
[ɑ ˈkamːɪd ͜ dɑ næː ˈhɪʰkʷɑ ˈnɑu̯ʰkʷɑːt͡sʊt~ˈnɑu̯ʰkvɑɪ̯ts]
a kammi–t da nả hikva naukva=tsut-Ø~naukvoa=its-Ø
top who.act top cop good dog=dim-act
‘who’s a good little dog?’
(71)inugiggeddanin bintṡet bůġyt~boġġitseut mi bỉṡki įo
inugiggi-t-tanin p-in-c--i-t p-u--ha-t p-u-hhic-i-ut mi p-iicki ju-
[ɪːnʊˈgɪkːɛtːɑːnɪn ˈbɪn̥t͡ʃɛt ˈbœːɣʏt~ˈbɔɣːɪːt͡sɛu̯t mɪ ˈbiːʃːkɪ jɔː]
inu-gigg-et-van-in bintṡet bůġ-yt~boġġits-eut mi bỉṡki-Ø įo
around-gather-dim-2˚.pst-infr.pl small.branch-acc.pl det boy-act det.pron.3a
‘the child was gathering little branches’

§4.10.2 Augmentatives

Augmentatives are formed much like diminutives. Polysyllabic nouns ending in vowels receive the ending -rut onto the asematic form which causes relaxation and backing of -i to -o- as -rut is only ever found after back vowels, and in the case of front-rounded vowels, the ending is -ůryt, and those ending in consonants get -rrut or -rryt, while monosyllabic nouns have -rut~-ryt or -rrut~-rryt added onto the sematic form. Augmentative nouns are declined like trisyllabic apocoptic nouns in -r. Another augmentative formant is -utsak/-itsak, which is declined like a polysyllabic consonantal noun in -k (-utsoġa/-itsoġa) and usually found on the asematic form of bisyllabic nouns (with or without diaphony). Augmentatives in -utsak/-itsak usually have a more emphatic, sometimes pejorative and sometimes approbative connotation, for example soaƛƛi ‘fish’ ⟫ soaƛutsak ‘big old fish, quite the fish, damn big fish’.

(72)diminutive
base nounasematicsematic
(73)soaƛƛisoaƛƛorutsauƛur
soaƛutsak~soaƛƛutsaksoaƛutsoġa~soaƛƛutsoġa
‘fish’‘big fish’
(74)tsukṇitsukṇoruttsuoġnur
tsuġnutsak~tsukṇutsaktsuġnutsoġa~tsukṇutsoġa
‘knife’‘big knife’
(75)bįuḷḷubįuḷḷorutbįuoƛƛur
bįuƛƛitsak~bįuḷḷitsakbįuƛƛitsoġa~bįuḷḷitsoġa
‘boy’‘big boy’
(76)tỏ toįįorutdvuoįur
toįįutsaktoįįutsoġa
‘rock’‘big rock’
(77)boġġiboġġorutbvuoġur
boġutsak~boġġutsakboġutsoġa~boġġutsoġa
‘branch’‘big branch’
(78)vukvivukvorutvuogvur
vugvutsak~vukvutsakvugvutsoġa~vukvutsoġa
‘bird’‘big bird’
(79)naukvisnaukvorrutnaugvur
naugvitsak~naukvitsaknaugvitsoġa~naukvitsoġa
‘dog’‘big dog’
(80)sakvinsakvorrutsoagvur
sagvutsak~sakvutsaksagvutsoġa~sakvutsoġa
‘man’‘big man’
(81)ġylkiġylkůrytġỷƛkyr
ġyƛkytsak~ġylkytsakġyƛkytsůġa~ġylkytsůġa
‘mountain’‘big mountain’
(82)nả-t ḷeů ṇikkyt antten naukvorrut
naa_0 Li-u-- n-ikka-t antti-n naukfu-rrut
[ˈnæːɬ ͜ ɬøː ˈn̥ɪʰkʏh ˈanːtɛn ˈnɑu̯ʰkʷɔrːʊt]
nả–t ḷeů ṇi=kkyt antt=en naukv=orrut-Ø
cop part 1.com large dog=augm-act
‘I certainly have a large dog’
(83)aggaƛƛas bįuoƛƛur laggi
aggaTTas p-jaa-TTur laggi
[ˈakːat͡ɬːas ˈbjʊu̯ʔƛʊr ˈlakːi]
agg=aƛƛ-as bįuoƛƛ=ur lagg-i
behave-2.imp boy=augm.gen way-acc
‘behave yourself like a big boy’
(84)nả kemmiḳ tsuġnutsak mi na-t de-t ṇet!
naa ki-mmikf c-uht-n-uc-ak mi na_0 t-i-_0 n-i-t!
[næː ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈt͡sʊxtːŋ̊ʊːt͡sak mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛn̥ ͜ n̥ːɛt]
nả kemmiḳ tsuġn=utsak-Ø mi na–t de–t ṇet
cop large knife=augm-act det pron.3i.act–prox.dem part
‘now this is a big knife!’
(85)nả ġylkůryt Tammeġġỷ na
naa g-a-Lku--ra-t tammi-g-ga-a- na
[næː ˈɣʏɬːkœːrʏt ˈtamːɛɣːyː nɑː]
nả ġylk=ůryt-Ø Tammeġġỷ-Ø na
cop mountain=augm-act Tammeġġỷ-act pron.3i.act
Tammeġgỷ is a large mountain’

§4.11 Hemiplural Nouns

Hemiplural nouns are a small group of nouns which are partially pluralised. Certain nouns in -nga have a singular form in the nominative but are pluralised in all sematic cases. These nouns have plural referents in verbs, and nearly all indicate pairs or reciprocal groups, such as manginga~sasunga ‘sisters’, dimminga~ġaġ(av)unga ‘brothers’, nennenga ‘friends (together, to each other)’, ikkunga ‘father and child(ren)’, ummunga ‘mother and child(ren)’, nuįįunga ‘grandmother and grandchild(ren)’, tṡuttṡunga ‘grandfather and grandchild(ren)’ and illįunga ‘family, band (of families living together)’.

A small group of quantifier indefinite pronouns are hemiplural, including sasṃasảtsṃit ‘a couple, a few, several (2-5), vaivvavảvit ‘several (5-10)’, vaiggavảddyt ‘(very) many (people)’, mįaiggamįảkkit ‘more than one, several’ and mįaihymįảhhit ‘the same (things)’. The pronoun vaivva ‘several’ usually has a singular referent if it refers to several items of the same type, but a plural referent if it refers to different types of items.

ikkungaỉkunitsingularplural

‘father and child(ren)’

asematicikkungaØ
sematicØỉkunit
inessiveØỉkunisit
illativeØỉkunuttut
elativeØỉkuningit
comitativeØỉkunein
essiveØikkungoattsot
vaivvavảvitsingularplural

‘several’

asematicvaivvaØ
sematicØvảvit
inessiveØvảvisit
illativeØvảvyttyt
elativeØvảvingit
comitativeØvảvein
essiveØvaivvattsůt

§4.11.1 Hemiplural Endonyms

Terms related to the endonym of Pine people, Niṡkullit or Niṡkit ‘Pine (language/person) and Niṡkuvukki ‘Pine land’, also exhibit some level of hemiplurality. The word Niṡkullit can refer both to Pine people or the Pine language, although Niṡkuvullit is much more commonly used for the people but can refer to the language, especially in more formal settings, but only in singular cases. When referring to people, Niṡku(vu)llit is a trisyllabic consonantal noun in -t (Niṡku(vu)llitNiṡku(vu)llen), but Niṡkullit ‘Pine language’ is treated as an adjective in -llit.

(86)asematicsematic
personNiṡku(vu)llitNiṡku(vu)llen
languageNiṡkullit, Niṡƛit, Niṡkullikketṡin, NiṡƛikketṡinNiṡkuƛit, Niṡƛit, Niṡƛitṡin, Niṡkuƛitṡen

When referring to the language, Niṡkullit or Niṡƛit are commonly pluralised in three cases only: in the asematic (Niṡkullikki or Niṡƛikki ), in the sematic (Niṡkuƛit or Niṡƛit) and in the elative (Niṡkuƛingit or Niṡƛingit), which exceptionally is used to mean ‘in the Pine language’, as with all languages. There are inessive and illative plural forms but they are often only found in more poetic contexts – for example Niṡƛisit ‘in Pine’ may sometimes be heard instead of Niṡƛingit. The expected comitative singular (as in enguƛukkit ‘in English’) Niṡku(vu)llittut can only be interpreted as the comitative singular of ‘Pine person’.

In addition, when Pine speakers talk about their language, they often add the possessive suffix -tṡin, which deletes any final -t or -n. This is only done in plural forms. Note that the essive is never found with a possessive suffix, and possessive suffixes are more commonly found with forms in Niṡk-. It is common therefore to hear Niṡƛikketṡin or Niṡkullikketṡin as the name of the language, or Niṡƛingitṡin~Niṡkuƛungitṡin ‘in Pine’ instead of Niṡƛingit or Niṡkuƛingit.

The -vu- infix found in the nominal adjective designating a person is seen as formal, polite, poetic or honorific. It is generally used when referring to others, but it cannot appear with a first-person pronoun when predicative or otherwise qualifying oneself, for example ganiṡkuḷva ‘I am Pine’, never *ganiṡkuvuḷva. It should be noted that using possessive suffix -tṡin may be considered inappropriate for non-Pine speakers. Pluralization of the language in the asematic and essive can be regarded adding a sense of familiarity or communality, while the presence of the infix -vu- in the word designating the language is highly poetic or honorific and is not heard in normal speech. The forms in Niṡku- are the standardised forms while the contracted forms in Niṡƛ- are more colloquial. In addition, the term (Ỏtu)niṡkuḷủlut has a more formal, neutral, academic or professional connotation, perhaps analogously to how ‘English’ can also be called ‘The English Language’. Moreover, Pine people sometimes refer to the act of speaking Pine, niṡkỏma, to refer to the language itself (then capitalised as Niṡkỏma), which is unaffected by apophony or diaphony when referring to the language itself, such that ‘in Pine’ can also be expressed as Niṡkuningit (rarely Niṡkuningitṡen) in the elative plural.

Finally, there exist epithetic alternatives for the language, most commonly Pỉƛƛuḷủlut, Biƛƛut and biƛƛit ḷủlut, Nįilkullit and Nįilkuḷủlut all of which referensing the association with pine trees.

Hemiplurality also applies to the noun niṡkuvut ‘land, country’. When pluralised as Niṡkuvukki, it refers to Pine people’s land. The locative cases and the comitative are not pluralised. It can be distinguished from the plural of niṡkuvut ‘land, country’ in sematic cases (and in some speakers the essive case as well) because exhibits front-alignment of declensional endings instead of the back-aligned series found in niṡkuvut ‘land, country’. It is commonly found with the possessive suffix -tṡin, in which case the -vu- infix is deleted: Niṡkukketṡin ‘our country, Pineland’. In poetic language however, the -vu- infix is sometimes retained, and Niṡkuvukketṡin can be heard.

Hemiplural endonymic terms that are semantically singular retain a singular referent. For example, Niṡkullit ‘Pine language’ is clearly pluralised in the sematic case, but when found with determiners, they are in the singular, and so is the verbal referent. Plural referents can occur but this is not standard.

(87)gagindet tsỉn ninut Niṡkuƛit a gami
gagint-i-t c-iin ninut nickuTit a/ gami
[gɑˈgɪnːdɛt t͡siːn ˈnɪːnʊʔ ˈnɪʃkʊːt͡ɬɪh ɑː ˈgɑːmɪ]
ga-gind-et tsỉn ninut Niṡku=ƛit a gami
1.ag-understand-3˚.prs only det.a.little Pine-acc.pl pron.3i pron.1.act
‘I only understand a little bit of Pine’

(rarely ?gagindetan tsỉn ninut Niṡkuƛit ỉ gami)

Niṡkullit Niṡkuƛit singularplural

‘Pine Language’

asematicNiṡkullitorNiṡkullikki~Niṡkullikketṡin
sematicØNiṡkuƛit~Niṡkuƛitṡen
inessiveNiṡkuƛummitØ (~Niṡkuƛusut)
illativeNiṡkuƛotØ (~Niṡkuƛittit)
elativeØNiṡkuƛungit~Niṡkuƛungitṡin
comitativeNiṡkuƛukkitØ
essiveNiṡkullitsorNiṡkullittset
Niṡƛit Niṡƛit singularplural

‘Pine Language’

asematicNiṡƛitorNiṡƛikki~Niṡƛikketṡen
sematicØNiṡƛit~Niṡƛitṡen
inessiveNiṡƛimmytØ (~Niṡƛisit)
illativeNiṡƛetØ (~Niṡƛuttut)
elativeØNiṡƛingit~Niṡƛingitṡin
comitativeNiṡƛikkyt~NiṡƛittytØ
essiveNiṡƛitsorNiṡƛittset
Niṡku(vu)llit Niṡku(vu)llen singularplural

‘Pine (person)’

asematicNiṡku(vu)llitNiṡku(vu)llikki
sematicNiṡku(vu)llenNiṡku(vu)lleut
inessiveNiṡku(vu)llimmitNiṡku(vu)lleusut
illativeNiṡku(vu)llegotNiṡku(vu)lleittit
elativeNiṡku(vu)lleunnitNiṡku(vu)lleungit
comitativeNiṡku(vu)llittutNiṡku(vu)lleun
essiveNiṡku(vu)llitsNiṡku(vu)llittset
Niṡkuvukki Niṡkuvuit singularplural

‘Pineland’

asematicØorNiṡkuvukki~Niṡkukketṡin
sematicØNiṡkuvuit~Niṡkuitṡin
inessiveNiṡkuvummitØ
illativeNiṡkuvogetØ
elativeNiṡkuvuinnitØ
comitativeNiṡkuvuttitØ
essiveØNiṡkuvuttsot~Niṡkuvuttset

Compare Niṡkuvut~Niṡkuvukki ‘Pine land’ to niṡkuvut ‘land, country’:

niṡkuvut niṡkuvon singularplural

‘land, country’

asematicniṡkuvutniṡkuvukki
sematicniṡkuvonniṡkuvugit
inessiveniṡkuvummitniṡkuvuissit
illativeniṡkuvogetniṡkuvuittit
elativeniṡkuvuinnitniṡkuvuingit
comitativeniṡkuvuttitniṡkuvuin
essiveniṡkuvutsniṡkuvuttsot

§4.12 Foreign Nouns

Foreign nouns which have been borrowed into Pine from other languages have more than one possible sematic forms. Most new foreign words are declined normally, except that the rhizal apophony is strictly propolar, and therefore borrowings (sisatṇalinnogi 'loanwords') are similar in declension to polysyllabic nouns. Contrapolar apophony is rare, and usually only in much older borrowings, e.g. tuldu 'customs (rarely used nowadays, replaced by sisetġogi) ⟫ tůeltten (or tuoltten), and ollįa ‘oil’ becomes ỏlįen instead of the expected *vůlįen. The more recent a borrowing, the more likely speakers are to use these propolar forms. For example, ‘plastic’ was borrowed into Pine as lasta or lastiggi. Some speakers may decline them as loasten and lastỉku (propolar bisyllabic homorganic symphonic or polysyllabic heterorganic antiphonic), but more assimilated forms exist in lảsti and lảstit.

Foreign nouns tend to only undergo apophony for simple, non-geminate, non-diphthongal vowels. Anything beyond short vowels remains unaffected. For example, pỉttsa ‘pizza’ has a sematic form in pỉtso or pỉttso (not *bitso or *pįatso).

Efforts have been made to standardise sematic forms of borrowed words. Standardised forms tend to favour assimilation to Pine declension patterns as much as possible. The Niṡkuƛit Mįiḍkatsiḷḷovut (Pine Language Protection Committee) has proposed native neologism for many of these words, which are listed. Not all such proposals have gained support, but most Pine speakers are aware of them. Forms in bold are more preferred or common.

asematicmeaningsematicneologism
ba=nani‘banana’banoadnenṡalkkisiḷḷįis
bankka‘bank’boankisasuha
bara‘bar’boarrikůįįan
bussa‘bus’bủsimoadnurreġġi
gỉtari‘guitar’gỉtoarre~gỉttarṡimmat
(g)ramma‘gram’(g)roamiaḷḷilppuġut
(g)rilla‘grill’(g)rỉlotṡẻlġat
hotelli‘hotel’hoteilon~hỏtilhevvamuna
tṡeppi‘jeep’tṡeibbureġġorut
ka=kau‘cacao’kakaįįuůmitṇa
kỉlỏ‘kilo’kỉlỏ~kỉloįįuaḷḷurppuġut
(k)roko=dilli‘crocodile’(k)rokodỉlu~(k)rokodỉlongvuoġnurůddyr
lasta, lastiggi‘plastic’loasten~lảsti, lastỉku~lảstitapṡiggut
meloni‘melon’(meloadni)~meulluniįįilbillįorut
metteri‘metre’(metteirru)~meitirpallis
millįuni~millįuna‘million’(millįuodnen)~mỉlįundalorut
mottsa=rella‘mozzarella’mottsareilonnįeggukidna
ỏlivi~ỏliu‘olive’ỏlỉvvu~ỏliįįuaḍḍabillįu
ollįa‘oil’ỏlįenỉbbil
ỏpera‘opera’ỏpeirru~ỏppir
pappir‘paper’pappera
pỉanỏ‘piano’pỉanỏ~pỉanoįįu
pỉttsa‘pizza’pỉttso~pỉtso
(p)rovvessori‘professor’(p)rovvessoarren~(p)rovvessur
sallat~saladdi‘salad’sallo(n)~soallat~saloatten
taksi‘taxi’toakse
tomaddi‘tomato’tỏmat~dvoabmat~tomoatte
(t)raktori‘tractor’(t)raktoarre~(t)roaġtur
(t)rompedda‘trumpet’(t)rompeittu~(t)roamppit
topaggi‘tobacco’tỏpat~dvoappat~topoakke
toppat‘tobacco’toppo(n)
viṡki‘whiskey’vỉṡku~vỉktṡu